Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

Fanuc Manual Guide 0+

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 210

7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0+

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-64434EN/02
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.


• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When using a machine equipped with the FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i, be sure to observe the
following safety precautions.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE


This manual includes safety precautions protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to the degree of the risk or the severity of
damage.
Also, supplementary information is described as Note.
Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger to the user being injured or when there is a risk
to the user, being injured, and the equipment, being damaged, if the warning
statement is not followed up.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger to the equipment being damaged, if the caution
statement is not followed up.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS


To ensure safety while using a machine featuring the MANUAL GUIDE 0i function, observe the
following precautions:

WARNING
1 Confirm, on the screen, that the data has been entered correctly before
proceeding to the next operation. Attempting operation with incorrect data may
cause the tool to strike the workpiece or machine, possibly breaking the tool
and/or machine and/or injuring the operator.
2 When using constant surface speed control in the lathe, set the data item of the
maximum spindle speed to the value allowed for the workpiece and workpiece
holding unit. Otherwise, the workpiece or holding unit may be removed by
centrifugal force damaging the machine or injuring the operator.
3 Set all necessary parameters and data items before starting MANUAL GUIDE 0i
operations. Note that if the cutting conditions are not suitable for the workpiece,
the tool may be damaged and/or the operator may be injured.

s-1
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64434EN/02

WARNING
4 After creating a machining program using MANUAL GUIDE 0i functions, do no
run the machining program immediately on the machine . Before starting
production machining, run the machine with no workpiece attached to the
machine to make sure that the tool will not strike a workpiece or the machine. If
the tool strikes the machine and/or workpiece, the tool and/or machine may be
damaged, with possibility to injure the operator.
5 Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement
units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position.
Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement units are
being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data specified may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

CAUTION
After pressing the power-on button, do not touch any keys on the keyboard until
the initial screen appears. Some keys are used for maintenance or special
operations such that pressing such a key may cause an unexpected operation.

OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL


This manual describes the functions of "MANUAL GUIDE 0i" for the Series 0i -TD/MD or Series 0i
Mate-TD/MD.
For other functions, other than MANUAL GUIDE 0i, refer to the User’s Manual for the Series 0i
-TD/MD or Series 0i Mate-TD/MD.
In this manual, the description about the Series 0i Mate-MD or Series 0i-MD is marked with "Machining
Center System" and the description about Series 0i Mate-TD or Series 0i-TD is marked with "Lathe
System".
The specifications and features of MANUAL GUIDE 0i may differ from the specifications of the
operator’s manual supplied by the machine tool builder. Be sure to read the manual provided by the
machine tool builder.
The functions of the CNC machine tool system are determined not only by the CNC, but by the
combination of the machine tool, the power magnetic circuit of the machine tool, the servo system, the
CNC, and the operator’s panel.
It is impossible to cover all possible combinations of all functions, programming methods, and operations
in a single manual.
This manual explains only the MANUAL GUIDE 0i operations provided for the CNC. For individual
CNC machine tools, refer to applicable manuals supplied by the machine tool builders.
This manual explains as many detailed functions as possible. However, it is not possible to describe all
the items which cannot be done or which the operator must not do. Therefore, please assume that
functions not described in this manual cannot be performed.
Detailed information and special conditions are explained in notes. The readers may encounter new
technical terms in the notes not previously defined or described. In this case, read this manual through
first, and then review the details.

s-2
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-1
OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL .............................................................................. s-2

I. WHAT’S MANUAL GUIDE 0i ?


1 WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE 0i? .............................................................. 3
1.1 CONDITIONS FOR USING MANUAL GUIDE 0i................................................. 4

II. BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATIONS


1 MAIN MENU SCREEN ............................................................................ 7
2 PROCESS SUPPORT FUNCTION ......................................................... 9
2.1 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS .................................................................... 9
2.2 INPUT ITEMS ................................................................................................ 9
3 G CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION........................................................... 11
3.1 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS .................................................................. 11
3.1.1 G Code Help Screen ...............................................................................................11
3.1.2 G Code Text Screen ...............................................................................................12
3.1.3 G Code Graph Screen.............................................................................................13
3.2 SUPPORTED G CODES ............................................................................. 13
4 M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION........................................................... 16
4.1 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS .................................................................. 16
4.1.1 M Code Help Screen ..............................................................................................16
4.1.2 M Code Text Screen...............................................................................................17
4.2 SUPPORTED M CODES............................................................................. 17
5 MACHINING CYCLE FUNCTION ......................................................... 19
6 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING FUNCTION ............................................ 20

III. MILLING CYCLE (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM)


1 MACHINING TYPE................................................................................ 23
2 OPERATING METHOD ......................................................................... 24
2.1 NEWLY CREATING A MACHINING CYCLE............................................... 24
2.2 EDITING A MACHINING CYCLE ................................................................ 26
3 INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE ............................................................ 27
3.1 HOLE MACHINING ..................................................................................... 27
3.1.1 Machining Type Block...........................................................................................27
3.1.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................29
3.2 FACE MACHINING...................................................................................... 32
3.2.1 Machining Type Block...........................................................................................32
c-1
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64434EN/02

3.2.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................33


3.3 POCKET MACHINING ................................................................................ 33
3.3.1 Machining Type Block...........................................................................................33
3.3.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................35
3.4 GROOVE MACHINING ............................................................................... 35
3.4.1 Machining Type Block...........................................................................................35
3.4.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................37

IV. TURNING CYCLE (LATHE SYSTEM)


1 MACHINING TYPE................................................................................ 41
2 OPERATING METHOD ......................................................................... 42
2.1 NEWLY CREATING A MACHINING CYCLE............................................... 42
2.1.1 Operating Method of Turning ................................................................................42
2.1.2 Operating Method of Drilling, Grooving, or Threading.........................................44
2.2 EDITING A MACHINING CYCLE ................................................................ 46
3 INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE ............................................................ 47
3.1 DRILLING .................................................................................................... 47
3.1.1 Machining Type Block...........................................................................................47
3.2 TURNING .................................................................................................... 48
3.2.1 Machining Type Block...........................................................................................48
3.2.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................49
3.3 GROOVING ................................................................................................. 49
3.3.1 Machining Type Block...........................................................................................49
3.3.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................51
3.4 THREADING................................................................................................ 52
3.4.1 Machining Type Block...........................................................................................52
3.4.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................52

4 DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING ..................................................... 54


4.1 “AUTOMATIC CALCULATING END POINT” TYPE .................................... 54
4.1.1 Start-up Method......................................................................................................54
4.1.2 Selecting Method of Editing The Turning Figure ..................................................54
4.1.3 Method of Creating of turning Figure ....................................................................55
4.1.4 Input Method of Figure Block................................................................................58
4.1.5 Automatic Calculation of Figure Block .................................................................60
4.1.5.1 LINE .................................................................................................................. 60
4.1.5.2 ARC ................................................................................................................... 62
4.1.5.3 LINE TANGENTIAL TO TWO ARCS............................................................ 64
4.1.5.4 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO BOTH CROSSING LINES AND ARCS ......... 65
4.1.5.5 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING LINE AND ARC.................... 66
4.1.5.6 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING 2 ARCS .................................. 66
4.1.6 Auxiliary Calculation .............................................................................................67
4.1.6.1 START POINT.................................................................................................. 68
4.1.6.2 LINE .................................................................................................................. 71
4.1.6.3 ARC ................................................................................................................... 72
4.1.6.4 OTHERS............................................................................................................ 74
4.2 “INPUTING DIRECTLY END POINT” TYPE................................................ 75
4.2.1 Start-up Method......................................................................................................75
4.2.2 Method of Creating Figure .....................................................................................75

c-2
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

V. CONTOUR PROGRAMMING
1 OPERATING METHOD ......................................................................... 79
1.1 CALLING CONTOUR PROGRAMMING SCREEN...................................... 79
1.2 SELECTING OF METHOD TO EDIT OF CONTOUR PROGRAM .............. 80
1.3 METHOD OF CREATING A CONTOUR PROGRAM.................................. 80
1.4 CHECKING CONTOUR PROGRAMS......................................................... 82
1.5 CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM.................................................................... 82
2 CONTOUR FIGURE DATA ................................................................... 84
2.1 START POINT ............................................................................................. 84
2.2 LINE............................................................................................................. 84
2.3 ARC ............................................................................................................. 85
2.4 CORNER R.................................................................................................. 85
2.5 CHAMFERING............................................................................................. 85
2.6 SELECT CROSSING POINT OF FIGURE .................................................. 86
3 CONTOUR CALCULATION.................................................................. 87
3.1 LINE............................................................................................................. 87
3.2 ARC ............................................................................................................. 89
3.3 LINE TANGENTIAL TO TWO ARCS ........................................................... 91
3.4 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO BOTH CROSSING LINES AND ARCS .......... 92
3.5 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING LINE AND ARC ..................... 93
3.6 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING 2 ARCS ................................. 93
4 AUXILIARY CALCULATION................................................................. 94
4.1 START POINT ............................................................................................. 95
4.2 LINE............................................................................................................. 98
4.3 ARC ............................................................................................................. 99
4.4 OTHERS.................................................................................................... 100
4.4.1 Calculation of Inputting Data ...............................................................................100
4.4.2 Notes.....................................................................................................................101

APPENDIX
A ALARMS ............................................................................................. 105
A.1 MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM ALARMS ............................................... 105
A.2 LATHE SYSTEM ALARMS........................................................................ 106
B PARAMETERS.................................................................................... 108
B.1 PARAMETERS COMMON TO THE MACHINING CENTER AND LATHE
SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 108
B.2 LATHE SYSTEM PARAMETERS.............................................................. 112
C LINKING MACRO CREATED BY MACHINE TOOL BUILDER WITH
MANUAL GUIDE 0i MACRO .............................................................. 120
C.1 CREATING A MACRO PROGRAM ........................................................... 120
C.2 RESTRICTIONS ON MACRO PROGRAM NUMBERS ............................. 120
C.3 RESTRICTIONS ON MACRO VARIABLES............................................... 121
c-3
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64434EN/02

C.4 CUSTOM SOFTWARE CAPACITY ........................................................... 121


D CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE TOOL
BUILDER............................................................................................. 122
D.1 AUXILIARY EXPLANATION ON THE CUATOMIZATION OF “M CODE
SUPPORT FUNCTION”............................................................................. 122
D.1.1 Customizing M Code Help Screen .......................................................................122
D.1.2 Customizing M Code Text Screen .......................................................................122
D.2 AUXILIARY EXPLANATION ON THE CUSTOMIZING METHOD OF “M CODE
SUPPORT FUNCTION”............................................................................. 123
D.2.1 Customizing Method of M Code Help Screen .....................................................123
D.2.1.1 Displaying Method of M Code List................................................................. 123
D.2.1.2 Defining Message to Display on the M Code List........................................... 124
D.2.1.3 Changing Message according to the selected display language ...................... 125
D.2.1.4 Displaying Method of M Code Text Screen from M Code Help Screen......... 126
D.2.2 Customizing Method of M Code Text Screen......................................................126
D.2.2.1 Method od Displaying Title of M Code Explanation ...................................... 126
D.2.2.2 Method of Displaying M code Explanation..................................................... 127
D.2.2.3 Method of Defining Message for M Code Explanation................................... 127
D.2.3 Building Customized Conversational Macro Programs .......................................128
D.2.4 Sample of Messages in Each Language ...............................................................128
D.2.4.1 Sample of Messages in Japanese ..................................................................... 128
D.2.4.2 Sample of Messages in English ....................................................................... 131
D.2.4.3 Sample of Messages in Germany..................................................................... 133
D.2.4.4 Sample of Messages in Italy ............................................................................ 136
D.2.4.5 Sample of Messages in French ........................................................................ 139
D.2.4.6 Sample of Messages in Spanish....................................................................... 142
D.2.4.7 Sample of Messages in Chinese (Traditional character).................................. 144
D.2.4.8 Sample of Messages in Portuguese.................................................................. 147
D.2.4.9 Sample of Messages in Polish ......................................................................... 150
D.2.4.10 Sample of Messages in Swedish...................................................................... 152
D.2.4.11 Sample of Messages in Czech ......................................................................... 155

c-4
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

I. WHAT’S MANUAL GUIDE 0i ?


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE 0i?1.WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE 0i?

1 WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE 0i?


MANUAL GUIDE 0i is the programming operation guidance function that specializes in creation of a
machining program and pursues simple operation.
The screen of MANUAL GUIDE 0i is displayed when soft key [C.A.P.] on the NC program edit screen is
pressed.

MANUAL GUIDE 0i has the following features.

1. ISO code part programming


ISO code part programming can be used to directly input simple operation such as linear or arc
machining with G codes or easily input complicated operation such as pocketing or turning with a
machining cycle.

2. Easy specification of a tool, spindle, coolant, and feedrate


These conditions can easily be specified on a screen before machining.

3. Easy programming of G codes and M codes


G codes and M codes can easily be input with reference to the screen for G code description and
illustration and the screen for M code description and illustration.

4. Preparation of machining cycles often used for machining centers and lathes
The following machining cycles are provided. A program of machining cycles can be created only if
the necessary data is input according to the guide maps and messages displayed on the screen.

< Machining Cycle for Machining Center System >


(1) Hole machining (pattern figure)
(2) Pocketing (pattern figure)
(3) Facing (pattern figure)
(4) Grooving (pattern figure)

< Machining Cycle for Lathe System >


(1) Drilling (workpiece center)
(2) Turning (arbitrary figure)
(3) Grooving (normal groove, trapezoidal groove)
(4) Threading (general-purpose thread, metric thread, unified thread, PT/PF thread)

5. Easy input of contour figure


A contour figure consisting of lines and arcs can easily be input and be converted into an
NC command block (G01/G02/G03). In addition, advance figure calculation functions
including 11 auxiliary calculation functions can be performed.

-3-
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

1.WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE 0i?WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE 0i? B-64434EN/02

NOTE
1 Soft key [C.A.P.] also appears when conversational programming with graphic is
enabled. When both MANUAL GUIDE 0i and conversational programming with
graphic are enabled, MANUAL GUIDE 0i takes precedence.
2 MANUAL GUIDE 0i is disabled in a mode other than the EDIT mode.
3 MANUAL GUIDE 0i is disabled in BG editing.
4 MANUAL GUIDE 0i operates only in path 1 and is not displayed in path 2. In
path 2, the machining cycle of MANUAL GUIDE 0i is not performed.
5 MANUAL GUIDE 0i supports both the 8.4-inch and 10.4-inch display units. The
screen configuration is the same in both display units.

1.1 CONDITIONS FOR USING MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Increment system of only IS-B is available.

-4-
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

II. BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATIONS


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


B-64434EN/02 OPERATION 1.MAIN MENU SCREEN

1 MAIN MENU SCREEN


When soft key [C.A.P.] on the NC program edit screen is pressed in the EDIT mode, MANUAL GUIDE
0i is started and the main menu screen below appears.
A machining program can easily be created if menu selection is made according to the guide on the
screen.

Main menu screen (Machining Center System) Main menu screen (Lathe System)

On the main menu screen, the menus of the following functions can be selected.

(1) Process support function


→ Selected with soft key [PROCES] (next page).
(2) G code support function
→ Selected with soft key [G CODE] (next page).
(3) M code support function
→ Selected with soft key [M CODE] (next page).
(4) Machining cycle function
→ Selected with soft key [DRILL], [POCKET], [FACING], or [GROOVE]
→ Selected with soft key [DRILL], [TURN], [GROOVE], or [THREAD]
(5) Contour programming function
→ Selected with soft key [CONTUR] (next page).

When the leftmost soft key is pressed, the NC program edit screen is displayed again.

The above functions are described below.

NOTE
1 MANUAL GUIDE 0i requires a work program that stores a CNC program to be
created temporarily. Set parameter No. 9358 to the number of this work
program.
(If this parameter is not set, the screen of MANUAL GUIDE 0i does not appear.)

-7-
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


1.MAIN MENU SCREEN OPERATION B-64434EN/02

NOTE
2 The program to be displayed by soft key [C.A.P.] depends on the cursor position
on the NC program edit screen.
• When the cursor positions in the block containing a 4-digit code for machining
cycle, the machining cycle data input screen is displayed.
• When the cursor positions in a block not containing a 4-digit code for
machining cycle, the main menu screen is displayed.
3 When soft key [C.A.P.] is pressed if there is no CNC program, a warning saying
"INITIALIZATION OF MG0I CANNOT BE COMPLETED." is displayed. Be sure
to create one or more CNC programs before pressing soft key [C.A.P.].

-8-
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


B-64434EN/02 OPERATION 2.PROCESS SUPPORT FUNCTION

2 PROCESS SUPPORT FUNCTION


Chapter 2, "PROCESS SUPPORT FUNCTION" consists of the following sections:

5.1 OVERVIEW .........................................................................................................................................9


5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE .............................................................................................................................9

2.1 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS


On the process support screen, it is possible to enter information about the conditions required for
machining.
When soft key [PROCES] on the next page is pressed on the main menu screen, the process support
screen below is displayed.

Process support screen (Machining Center System) Process support screen (Lathe System)

Follow the steps below on the process support screen.

(1) Move the cursor to the desired item with the MDI cursor key.
(2) When the input item is numeric data, enter the data with MDI keys and press the [INPUT] key.
(3) When the input item is character data, make selection from displayed data with the cursor keys on
the left and right sides of the MDI key panel.
(4) To add the entered data to the machining program, press soft key [ACCEPT]. The entered data is
added to the machining program and the main menu screen is displayed again.
(5) To cancel the entered data, press the leftmost key to return to the main menu screen.

2.2 INPUT ITEMS


The input items on the process support screen are described in detail below.

(1) Input items for Machining Center System

Item name Address Code to be output Description Input range/alternatives


FEED F F Feedrate 0.0 to 30000.0

-9-
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


2.PROCESS SUPPORT FUNCTION OPERATION B-64434EN/02

Item name Address Code to be output Description Input range/alternatives


SPINDLE DIR M3/4/5 Rotation direction CW
CCW
OFF
S S Spindle speed 0 to 6000
COOLANT CLT M7/8/9 Selection of a coolant FLOOD
MIST
OFF
TOOLING NUM T Tool number 0 to 9999
H G49 H Tool offset number 0 to 400
D G40 D Cutter compensation number 0 to 400
TL COMP LEN G43/44/49 Selection of a tool LEN PLUS
compensation length LEN MINUS
OFF
DIA G40/41/42 Selection of a tool COMP LEFT
compensation direction COMP RIGHT
OFF

The following item is added when bit 2 of parameter No. 9300 is 1.

Z POINT Z Z Z-coordinate (absolute) -99999.999 to 99999.999

(2) Input items for Lathe System

Item name Address Code to be output Description Input range/alternatives


FEED F F Feedrate 0.0001 to 500.0000
SPINDLE DIR M3/4/5 Selection of a rotation CW
direction CCW
OFF
S S Spindle speed 0 to 6000
COOLANT CLT M7/8/9 Selection of a coolant FLOOD
MIST
OFF
T-CODE NUM T T code number 0 to 9999

The following items are added when bit 5 of parameter No. 9300 is 1.

CSS/RPM None G96/97 Selection of surface RPM


speed/spindle speed CSS
MAX RPM None G50 S Maximum spindle speed 0 to 60000
CYCLE X G0 X. Y Start X coordinate -99999.999 to 99999.999
ST POS X
CYCLE Y Start Y coordinate -99999.999 to 99999.999
ST POS Z

- 10 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


B-64434EN/02 OPERATION 3.G CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION

3 G CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION


Chapter 3, "G SUPPORT FUNCTION" consists of the following sections:

3.1 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS........................................................................................................11


3.1.1 G Code Help Screen.............................................................................................................11
3.1.2 G Code Text Screen .............................................................................................................12
3.1.3 G Code Graph Screen...........................................................................................................13
3.2 SUPPORTED G CODES ....................................................................................................................13

3.1 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS


On the G code support screen, it is possible to enter the desired G code with reference to the description
and illustration of the G code.

The G code support screen includes the following screens.


(1) G code help screen
(2) G code text screen
(3) G code graph screen

3.1.1 G Code Help Screen


When soft key [G CODE] is pressed on the main menu screen, the G code help screen below is displayed.
On the G code help screen, the supported G codes are listed. This menu is spread over several pages. The
total number of help pages and the current page number are displayed at the top of the menu.

Follow the steps below on the G code help screen.

(1) Use the MDI page key to switch to a list including the desired G code. The cursor page key on the
MDI key panel can be used to control the display of the G code help page. The menu screen is of
cyclic type.
(2) When the desired G code number is input and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the G code text screen of
the desired G code is displayed.
(3) When soft key [M CODE] is pressed, the M code help screen is displayed.
(4) When the leftmost soft key is pressed the main menu screen is displayed again.

- 11 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


3.G CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION OPERATION B-64434EN/02

3.1.2 G Code Text Screen


This screen describes the G code specified on the G code help screen using text.
In addition, a G code block can be added to the machining program on this screen.

G code text screen of G00

Follow the steps below on the G code text screen.

(1) For addition to the machining program


The entered NC statement block can be output to the machining program.
(a) Press the MDI key to input an NC statement block.
(b) Press the [INSERT] key.
(c) The entered NC statement block is output to the machining program and the main menu is
displayed again.
(2) For a return to the G code help screen
When the leftmost soft key is pressed, the G code help screen is displayed again.
(3) For switching to the G code graph screen
When soft key [GRAPH.] is pressed, the G code graph screen of the displayed G code is displayed
again.

- 12 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


B-64434EN/02 OPERATION 3.G CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION

3.1.3 G Code Graph Screen


This screen displays information about the G code specified on the G code help screen using illustration
and a sample program.
On this screen, a G code block can be generated and inserted into the machining program.

G code graph screen of G00

NOTE
Some G codes have no graphical help screen. In this case, no graphical help
screen appears even if [GRAPH.] is pressed.

Follow the steps below on the G code graph screen.

(1) For addition to the machining program


The input NC statement block can be output to the machining program.
(a) Press the MDI key to input an NC statement block.
(b) Press the [INSERT] key.
(c) The input NC statement block is output to the machining program and the main menu is
displayed again.
(2) For a return to the G code help screen
When the leftmost soft key is pressed, the G code help screen is displayed again.
(3) For switching to the G code graph screen
When soft key [GRAPH.] is pressed, the G code text screen of the displayed G code is displayed
again.

3.2 SUPPORTED G CODES


The G codes supported by the G code support function are listed below.

(1) G codes for Machining Center System


G code Description Text screen Graph screen
G00 Positioning ○ ○
G01 Linear interpolation ○ ○
G02 Circular interpolation CW ○ ○
G03 Circular interpolation CCW ○ ○
G04 Dwell ○ ○
G08 Advanced preview control ○ -
G09 Exact stop ○ -

- 13 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


3.G CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION OPERATION B-64434EN/02

G code Description Text screen Graph screen


G17 XY plane selection ○ ○
G18 ZX plane selection ○ ○
G19 YZ plane selection ○ ○
G20 Input in inch ○ ○
G21 Input in mm ○ ○
G22 Stored stroke check function on ○ -
G23 Stored stroke check function off ○ -
G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off ○ -
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on ○ -
G27 Reference position return check ○ -
G28 Automatic return to reference position ○ ○
G29 Movement from reference position ○ ○
G31 Skip function ○ ○
G40 Cutter compensation : cancel ○ -
G41 Cutter compensation : left ○ ○
G42 Cutter compensation : right ○ ○
G43 Tool length compensation + ○ ○
G44 Tool length compensation - ○ ○
G45 Tool offset : increase ○ -
G46 Tool offset : decrease ○ -
G47 Tool offset : double increase ○ -
G48 Tool offset : double decrease ○ -
G49 Tool length compensation cancel ○ -
G52 Local coordinate system setting ○ ○
G53 Machine coordinate system setting ○ -
G60 Single direction positioning ○ ○
G61 Exact stop mode ○ -
G63 Tapping mode ○ -
G64 Cutting mode ○ -

(2) G codes for Lathe System


G code Description Text screen Graph screen
G00 Positioning ○ ○
G01 Linear interpolation ○ ○
G02 Circular interpolation CW ○ ○
G03 Circular interpolation CCW ○ ○
G04 Dwell ○ ○
G20 Input in inch ○ -
G21 Input in mm ○ -
G22 Stored stroke check function on ○ ○
G23 Stored stroke check function off ○ ○
G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off ○ -
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on ○ -
G27 Reference position return check ○ -
G28 Automatic return to reference position ○ ○
G31 Skip function ○ ○
G32 Threading ○ ○
G34 Variable lead threading ○ -
G40 Tool nose radius compensation : cancel ○ -
G41 Tool nose radius compensation : left ○ ○
G42 Tool nose radius compensation : right ○ ○
G50 Coordinate system setting ○ ○
G52 Local coordinate system setting ○ ○

- 14 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


B-64434EN/02 OPERATION 3.G CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION

G code Description Text screen Graph screen


G53 Machine coordinate system setting ○ -
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection ○ -
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection ○ -
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection ○ -
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection ○ -
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection ○ -
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection ○ -
G65 Macro call ○ -
G66 Macro modal call ○ -
G67 Macro modal call cancel ○ -
G70 Finishing cycle ○ -
G71 Stock removal in turning ○ ○
G72 Stock removal in facing ○ ○
G73 Pattern repeating cycle ○ ○
G74 End face peck drilling cycle ○ ○
G75 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle ○ -
G76 Multiple-thread cutting cycle ○ ○
G80 Canned cycle cancel for drilling ○ -
G83 G87 Cycle for face/side drilling ○ ○
G84 Cycle for face/side tapping ○ ○
G85 Cycle for face/side boring ○ ○
G90 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle ○ ○
G92 Threading cycle ○ ○
G94 End face turning cycle ○ ○
G96 Constant surface speed control ○ -
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel ○ -
G98 Feed per minute ○ -
G99 Feed per revolution ○ -
G65 Macro call ○ -
G66 Macro modal call ○ -
G67 Macro modal call cancel ○ -
G73 Peck drilling cycle ○ ○
G74 Reverse tapping cycle ○ ○
G76 Fine boring cycle ○ ○
G80 Canned cycle cancel ○ -
G81 Drilling cycle ○ ○
G82 Drilling cycle ○ ○
G83 Peck drilling cycle ○ ○
G84 Tapping cycle ○ ○
G85 Boring cycle ○ ○
G86 Boring cycle ○ ○
G87 Back boring cycle ○ ○
G88 Boring cycle ○ ○
G89 Boring cycle ○ ○
G90 Absolute programming ○ ○
G91 Incremental programming ○ ○
G92 Workpiece coordinate system setting ○ ○
G94 Feed per minute ○ -
G95 Feed per revolution ○ -
G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level ○ ○
G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level ○ ○

- 15 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


4.M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION OPERATION B-64434EN/02

4 M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION


Chapter 4, "M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION" consists of the following sections:

4.1 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS........................................................................................................16


4.1.1 M Code Help Screen...............................................................................................................16
4.1.2 M Code Text Screen ...............................................................................................................17
4.2 SUPPORTED M CODES ...................................................................................................................17

4.1 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS


On the M code support screen, it is possible to enter the desired M code with reference to the description
and illustration of the M code.

The M code support screen includes the following screens.


(1) M code help screen
(2) M code text screen

4.1.1 M Code Help Screen


When soft key [M CODE] is pressed on the main menu screen, the M code help screen below is
displayed.
On the M code help screen, the supported M codes are listed. This menu is spread over several pages. The
total number of help pages and the current page number are displayed at the top of the menu.

Follow the steps below on the M code help screen.

(1) Use the MDI page key to switch to a list including the desired M code. The cursor page key on the
MDI key panel can be used to control the display of the M code help page. The menu screen is of
cyclic type.
(2) When the desired M code number is input and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the M code text screen of
the desired M code is displayed.
(3) When soft key [G CODE] is pressed, the G code help screen is displayed.
(4) When the leftmost soft key is pressed the main menu screen is displayed again.

- 16 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


B-64434EN/02 OPERATION 4.M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION

4.1.2 M Code Text Screen


This screen describes the M code specified on the M code help screen using text.
In addition, an M code block can be added to the machining program on this screen.

M code text screen of M00

Follow the steps below on the M code text screen.

(1) For addition to the machining program


The entered NC statement block can be output to the machining program.
(a) Press the MDI key to input an NC statement block.
(b) Press the [INSERT] key.
(c) The entered NC statement block is output to the machining program and the main menu is
displayed again.
(2) For a return to the M code help screen
When the leftmost soft key is pressed, the M code help screen is displayed again.

4.2 SUPPORTED M CODES


The M codes supported by the M code support function are listed below.

M code Description Text screen Graph screen


M00 Program stop ○ -
M01 Optional stop ○ -
M02 End of program ○ -
M03 Forward spindle rotation ○ -
M04 Reverse spindle rotation ○ -
M05 Spindle stop ○ -
M06 Tool change ○ -
M07 Fluid coolant ○ -
M08 Mist coolant ○ -
M09 Coolant off ○ -
M19 Spindle orientation ○ -
M30 Program stop and rewind ○ -
M48 Spindle speed override enabled ○ -
M49 Spindle speed override 100% ○ -
M67 Motor 1 start ○ -
M68 Motor 2 start ○ -
M69 Motor 3 start ○ -

- 17 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


4.M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION OPERATION B-64434EN/02

M code Description Text screen Graph screen


M77 Motor 1 stop ○ -
M78 Motor 2 stop ○ -
M79 Motor 3 stop ○ -
M98 Calling of subprogram ○ -
M99 End of subprogram ○ -

- 18 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

BASIC SCREEN AND


B-64434EN/02 OPERATION 5.MACHINING CYCLE FUNCTION

5 MACHINING CYCLE FUNCTION


MANUAL GUIDE 0i provides the following machining cycles, which can be used to easily program
complicated operation such as pocketing or turning.

< Machining Cycle for Machining Center System >


(1) Hole machining (pattern figure)
(2) Pocketing (pattern figure)
(3) Facing (pattern figure)
(4) Grooving (pattern figure)

< Machining Cycle for Lathe System >


(1) Drilling (workpiece center)
(2) Turning (arbitrary figure)
(3) Grooving (normal groove, trapezoidal groove)
(4) Threading (general-purpose thread, metric thread, unified thread, PT/PF thread)

For details, see Part III, "MILLING CYCLE (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM)" and Part IV,
"TURNING CYCLE (LATHE SYSTEM)".

- 19 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

6. CONTOUR PROGRAMMING BASIC SCREEN AND


FUNCTION OPERATION B-64434EN/02

6 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING FUNCTION


MANUAL GUIDE 0i has the contour programming function, which can be used to input a contour figure
consisting of lines and arcs. This contour programming includes high performance contour calculation
functions such as 30 blocks of pending and 11 patterns of auxiliary calculation.
The operator can input a contour figure consisting of lines and arcs by using contour programming. The
contour figure can be converted into a standard ISO code program (such as G01/G02/G03) that traces the
contour figure or the figure data block of a turning cycle (such as G1400/G1401/G1402/G1403/G1406).
The type of a program created by operation can also be selected.
During input of a contour figure, auxiliary calculation other than intersection calculation can be used to
obtain the end coordinates of the figure.
For details, see Part V, "CONTOUR PROGRAMMING".

NOTE
1 A program created by contour programming of MANUAL GUIDE 0i cannot be
edited on the contour programming screen.
2 A maximum of 30 figures can be input by contour programming.

- 20 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

III. MILLING CYCLE


(MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM)
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) 1.MACHINING TYPE

1 MACHINING TYPE
MANUAL GUIDE 0i provides the following machining cycles.

Hole machining
G1000 Center drilling
G1001 Drilling
G1002 Tapping
Machining type block G1003 Reaming
G1004 Boring
G1005 Fine boring
G1006 Back boring
G1210 Hole pattern - Points
G1211 Hole pattern - Line (Equal interval)
G1212 Hole pattern - Line (Not Equal interval)
G1213 Hole pattern - Grid
Figure block
G1214 Hole pattern - Square
G1215 Hole pattern - Circle
G1216 Hole pattern - Arc (Equal interval)
G1217 Hole pattern - Arc (Not Equal interval)
Face machining
G1020 Facing - Rough
Machining type block
G1021 Facing - Finish
G1220 Fixed figure - Square
Figure block
G1221 Fixed figure - Circle
Pocket machining
G1040 Pocketing - Rough
G1041 Pocketing - Bottom finish
Machining type block G1042 Pocketing - Side finish
G1043 Pocketing - Chamfer
G1045 Pocketing - Drilling
G1220 Fixed figure - Square
Figure block G1221 Fixed figure - Circle
G1222 Fixed figure - Track
Groove machining
G1050 Grooving - Rough
G1051 Grooving - Bottom finish
Machining type block G1052 Grooving - Side finish
G1053 Grooving - Chamfer
G1055 Grooving - Drilling
Figure block G1223 Fixed figure - Radial line grooves

- 23 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
2.OPERATING METHOD (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

2 OPERATING METHOD
Chapter 2, "OPERATING METHOD", consists of the following sections:

2.1 NEWLY CREATING A MACHINING CYCLE ....................................................................................................................24


2.2 EDITING A MACHINING CYCLE .......................................................................................................................................26

2.1 NEWLY CREATING A MACHINING CYCLE


The method for newly creating a machining cycle is described below.

(1) On the main menu screen, select the machining type (hole machining, pocketing, facing, or
grooving) of the desired machining cycle with the corresponding soft key. When, for example,
pocketing is selected, the machining menu screen shown below appears.

(2) Select the desired machining type with the corresponding soft key. The data input screen of the
selected machining type block (when rough machining is selected) as shown below appears. For
details on the input items of each machining type block, see the next section. To cancel insertion,
press the leftmost soft key.

- 24 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) 2.OPERATING METHOD

(3) When the necessary data is entered and soft key [FIGURE] is pressed, a figure menu screen as
shown below appears. Only the menu of figures that can be used in the machining type block entered
immediately before is displayed. The machining type block entered here is added to the machining
program.

(4) When a figure is selected with the corresponding soft key, an data input screen as shown below
appears (SQUARE is selected in the following figure). For details on the input item of each figure
block, see the next section.

(5) When the necessary data has been entered, press soft key [NEXT F] or [END]. When [END] is
pressed, the entered figure block is added to the machining program and the main menu is displayed.
To enter a figure continuously, press [NEXT F]. Then, the entered figure block is added to the
machining program and the figure menu screen is displayed again.
To enter a machining type block and figure block and then add a figure block, press soft key
[FIGURE] on the main menu to display the figure menu screen and then select the necessary figure.

(6) To return to the CNC program screen, press the leftmost soft key on the main menu screen.

NOTE
When a machining type block and figure block are entered in a machining cycle
of MANUAL GUIDE 0i, these blocks must be paired.

- 25 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
2.OPERATING METHOD (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

2.2 EDITING A MACHINING CYCLE


Press function key [PROG] several times until soft key [C.A.P.] is displayed. To modify the machining
type clock and figure block of a machining cycle, move the cursor to a part other then EOB of the block
and press soft key [C.A.P.].
When the data input screen of the selected block is displayed, modify the necessary data and press soft
key [OK] to modify the machining program. Then, the CNC screen is displayed again.
If the leftmost soft key is pressed on the input data screen, modification of data is canceled and the CNC
screen is displayed again.

- 26 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

3 INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE


Chapter 3, "INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE", consists of the following sections:

3.1 HOLE MACHINING ..............................................................................................................................................................27


3.1.1 Machining Type Block .................................................................................................................................................27
3.1.2 Figure Block .................................................................................................................................................................29
3.2 FACE MACHINING...............................................................................................................................................................32
3.2.1 Machining Type Block .................................................................................................................................................32
3.2.2 Figure Block .................................................................................................................................................................33
3.3 POCKET MACHINING..........................................................................................................................................................33
3.3.1 Machining Type Block .................................................................................................................................................33
3.3.2 Figure Block .................................................................................................................................................................35
3.4 GROOVE MACHINING.........................................................................................................................................................35
3.4.1 Machining Type Block .................................................................................................................................................35
3.4.2 Figure Block .................................................................................................................................................................37

3.1 HOLE MACHINING

3.1.1 Machining Type Block


Center drilling : G1000
Data item Comment
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Drilling without dwell
2 : Drilling with dwell
C CLEARANCE Distance from the surface of workpiece to the start point of actual
cutting motion
I REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 1 : Return to initial point at moving to the next hole position
2 : Return to R point (start point of actual cutting motion) at moving
to the next hole position
F FEEDARATE Cutting feedrate
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.

Drilling : G1001
Data item Comment
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Drilling without dwell
2 : Drilling with dwell
3 : Peck drilling
4 : High speed peck drilling
C CLEARANCE Distance from the surface of workpiece to the start point of actual
cutting motion
I REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 1 : Return to initial point at moving to the next hole position
2 : Return to R point (start point of actual cutting motion) at moving
to the next hole position
Q CUTTING DEPTH Cutting in depth of one cutting motion
F FEEDARATE Cutting feedrate
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.

- 27 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

Tapping : G1002
Data item Comment
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Normal tapping
2 : Reverse tapping
3 : Rigid tapping
4 : Reverse rigid tapping
C CLEARANCE Distance from the surface of workpiece to the start point of actual
cutting motion
I REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 1 : Return to initial point at moving to the next hole position
2 : Return to R point (start point of actual cutting motion) at moving
to the next hole position
F FEEDARATE Cutting feedrate
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.
L THREADING LEAD Lead of a tapping thread
S SPINDLE SPEED Spindle rotating speed (min-1)

Reaming : G1003
Data item Comment
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Escape by G01 motion
2 : Escape by G00 motion
3 : Escape by G01 motion after dwell at bottom
C CLEARANCE Distance from the surface of workpiece to the start point of actual
cutting motion
I REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 1 : Return to initial point at moving to the next hole position
2 : Return to R point (start point of actual cutting motion) at moving
to the next hole position
F FEEDARATE Cutting feedrate
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.

Boring : G1004
Data item Comment
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Escape by G01 motion
2 : Escape by G00 motion
3 : Escape by G01 motion after dwell at bottom
C CLEARANCE Distance from the surface of workpiece to the start point of actual
cutting motion
I REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 1 : Return to initial point at moving to the next hole position
2 : Return to R point (start point of actual cutting motion) at moving
to the next hole position
F FEEDARATE Cutting feedrate
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.

Fine boring : G1005


Data item Comment
C CLEARANCE Distance from the surface of workpiece to the start point of actual
cutting motion
I REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 1 : Return to initial point at moving to the next hole position
2 : Return to R point (start point of actual cutting motion) at moving
to the next hole position
F FEEDARATE Cutting feedrate
Q SHIFT AMOUNT Shift motion distance after oriented spindle stop at the hole bottom

P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.

- 28 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

Back boring : G1006


Data item Comment
C CLEARANCE Distance from the bottom surface of workpiece to the start point of
actual cutting motion (positive value)
F FEEDARATE Cutting feedrate
Q SHIFT AMOUNT Shift motion distance after oriented spindle stop at the hole bottom

P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.

3.1.2 Figure Block


Points - Hole pattern : G1210
Data item Comment
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Hole depth (usually negative value)
H POINT-1 (X-AXIS) X-coordinate of 1st hole point
V POINT-1 (Y-AXIS) Y-coordinate of 1st hole point
A POINT-2 (X-AXIS) X-coordinate of 2nd hole point
C POINT-2 (Y-AXIS) Y-coordinate of 2nd hole point
D POINT-3 (X-AXIS) X-coordinate of 3rd hole point
E POINT-3 (Y-AXIS) Y-coordinate of 3rd hole point

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter all of the hole point data item, but a pair of X and Y
data for one hole position.

Line (Equal interval) - Hole pattern : G1211


Data item Comment
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Hole depth (usually negative value)
H START POINT (X-AXIS) Start point X-coordinate of the line (1st hole point)
V START POINT (Y-AXIS) Start point Y-coordinate of the line (1st hole point)
A ANGLE Angle of the line
C NUMBER OF HOLE Number of hole on the line
D PITCH WIDTH Distance on the line between 2 holes (positive value only)
E LINE LENGTH Distance on the line between line start point and the last hole point
(positive value only)
F OMITTING POINT-1 Hole number of 1st machining omitting hole
I OMITTING POINT-2 Hole number of 2nd machining omitting hole
J OMITTING POINT-3 Hole number of 3rd machining omitting hole
K OMITTING POINT-4 Hole number of 4th machining omitting hole

NOTE
Data entering of either PICTH WIDTH or LINE LENGHTH is permitted.
It is not necessary to enter all of the OMITTING HOLE data item.

Line (Not Equal interval) - Hole pattern : G1212


Data item Comment
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Hole depth (usually negative value)
H START POINT (X-AXIS) Start point X-coordinate of the line (1st hole point)
V START POINT (Y-AXIS) Start point Y-coordinate of the line (1st hole point)
A ANGLE Angle of the line

- 29 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

Data item Comment


C PITCH WIDTH-1 Distance on the line between 1st hole point and 2nd hole point
(positive value only)
D PITCH WIDTH-2 Distance on the line between 2nd hole point and 3rd hole point
(positive value only)
E PITCH WIDTH-3 Distance on the line between 3rd hole point and 4th hole point
(positive value only)
F PITCH WIDTH-4 Distance on the line between 4th hole point and 5th hole point
(positive value only)
I PITCH WIDTH-5 Distance on the line between 5th hole point and 6th hole point
(positive value only)
J PITCH WIDTH-6 Distance on the line between 6th hole point and 7th hole point
(positive value only)
K PITCH WIDTH-7 Distance on the line between 7th hole point and 8th hole point
(positive value only)
M PITCH WIDTH-8 Distance on the line between 8th hole point and 9th hole point
(positive value only)
P PITCH WIDTH-9 Distance on the line between 9th hole point and 10th hole point
(positive value only)
Q PITCH WIDTH-10 Distance on the line between 10th hole point and 11th hole point
(positive value only)

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter all of the PITCH WIDTH data item.

Grid - Hole pattern : G1213


Data item Comment
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Hole depth (usually negative value)
H START POINT (X-AXIS) Start point X-coordinate of the 1st side (1st hole point)
V START POINT (Y-AXIS) Start point Y-coordinate of the 1st side (1st hole point)
U LENGTH ALONG TO THE 1ST Length along to the 1st side
SIDE
W LENGTH ALONG TO THE 2ND Length along to the 2nd side
SIDE
I NUMBER OF HOLE ALONG TO Number of holes along to the 1st side
THE 1ST SIDE
J NUMBER OF HOLE ALONG TO Number of holes along to the 2nd side
THE 2ND SIDE
K ANGLE OF THE 1ST SIDE Angle of the 1st side
M ANGLE OF THE 2ND SIDE Angle of the 2nd side
A OMITTING POINT-1 Hole number of 1st machining omitting hole
C OMITTING POINT-2 Hole number of 2nd machining omitting hole
D OMITTING POINT-3 Hole number of 3rd machining omitting hole
E OMITTING POINT-4 Hole number of 4th machining omitting hole

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter all of the OMITTING HOLE data item.

Square - Hole pattern : G1214


Data item Comment
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Hole depth (usually negative value)
H START POINT (X-AXIS) Start point X-coordinate of the 1st side (1st hole point)
V START POINT (Y-AXIS) Start point Y-coordinate of the 1st side (1st hole point)
- 30 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

Data item Comment


U LENGTH ALONG TO THE 1ST Length along to the 1st side
SIDE
W LENGTH ALONG TO THE 2ND Length along to the 2nd side
SIDE
I NUMBER OF HOLE ALONG TO Number of holes along to the 1st side
THE 1ST SIDE
J NUMBER OF HOLE ALONG TO Number of holes along to the 2nd side
THE 2ND SIDE
K ANGLE OF THE 1ST SIDE Angle of the 1st side
M ANGLE OF THE 2ND SIDE Angle of the 2nd side
A OMITTING POINT-1 Hole number of 1st machining omitting hole
C OMITTING POINT-2 Hole number of 2nd machining omitting hole
D OMITTING POINT-3 Hole number of 3rd machining omitting hole
E OMITTING POINT-4 Hole number of 4th machining omitting hole

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter all of the OMITTING HOLE data item.

Circle - Hole pattern : G1215


Data item Comment
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Hole depth (usually negative value)
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the circle
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the circle
R RADIUS Radius of the circle
A START ANGLE Center angle of the 1st hole point
C NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes along to the circle
D OMITTING POINT-1 Hole number of 1st machining omitting hole
E OMITTING POINT-2 Hole number of 2nd machining omitting hole
F OMITTING POINT-3 Hole number of 3rd machining omitting hole
I OMITTING POINT-4 Hole number of 4th machining omitting hole

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter all of the OMITTING HOLE data item.

Arc (Equal interval) - Hole pattern : G1216


Data item Comment
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Hole depth (usually negative value)
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the arc
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the arc
R RADIUS Radius of the arc
A START ANGLE Center angle of the 1st hole point
C PITCH ANGLE Center angle between 2 holes point
D NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes along to the arc
E OMITTING POINT-1 Hole number of 1st machining omitting hole
F OMITTING POINT-2 Hole number of 2nd machining omitting hole
I OMITTING POINT-3 Hole number of 3rd machining omitting hole
J OMITTING POINT-4 Hole number of 4th machining omitting hole

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter all of the OMITTING HOLE data item.

- 31 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

Arc (Not Equal interval) - Hole pattern : G1217


Data item Comment
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Hole depth (usually negative value)
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the arc
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the arc
R RADIUS Radius of the arc
A START ANGLE Center angle of the 1st hole point
C PITCH ANGLE-1 Center angle between 1st hole and 2nd hole
D PITCH ANGLE-2 Center angle between 2nd hole and 3rd hole
E PITCH ANGLE-3 Center angle between 3rd hole and 4th hole
F PITCH ANGLE-4 Center angle between 4th hole and 5th hole
I PITCH ANGLE-5 Center angle between 5th hole and 6th hole
J PITCH ANGLE-6 Center angle between 6th hole and 7th hole
K PITCH ANGLE-7 Center angle between 7th hole and 8th hole
M PITCH ANGLE-8 Center angle between 8th hole and 9th hole
P PITCH ANGLE-9 Center angle between 9th hole and 10th hole
Q PITCH ANGLE-10 Center angle between 10th hole and 11th hole

3.2 FACE MACHINING

3.2.1 Machining Type Block


Facing - Rough : G1020
Data item Comment
T THICKNESS Removal amount at roughing
J CUT DEPTH OF TOOL –AXIS Cutting depth of one cutting along the tool axis direction (Z-axis)
H FINISHING AMOUNT Finishing amount
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
L CUT AMOUNT OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting amount of the tool radius direction
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Single directional cutting on X-Y plane
2 : Both directional cutting on X-Y plane
M CLEARANCE ALONG TO TOOL Distance from the side surface of workpiece to the cutting start point
RADIUS on X-Y plane
B START POINT 1 : Start cutting at point 1
2 : Start cutting at point 2
3 : Start cutting at point 3
4 : Start cutting at point 4

Facing - Finish : G1021


Data item Comment
F FEEDRATE Finishing feedrate along the tool radius direction
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
L CUT AMOUNT OF TOOL RADIUS Cutting amount of the tool radius direction
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Single directional cutting on X-Y plane
2 : Both directional cutting on X-Y plane
M CLEARANCE ALONG TO TOOL Distance from the side surface of workpiece to the cutting start point
RADIUS on X-Y plane

- 32 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

Data item Comment


B START POINT 1 : Start cutting at point 1
2 : Start cutting at point 2
3 : Start cutting at point 3
4 : Start cutting at point 4

3.2.2 Figure Block


Square - Fixed figure : G1220
Data item Comment
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the square
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the square
U LENGTH ALONG TO THE X-AXIS Length of square side along X-axis
W LENGTH ALONG TO THE Y-AXIS Length of square side along Y-axis
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Not used in facing, so need not enter
A ANGLE Angle from X-axis
R CORNER RADIUS Radius of each corner of the square

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter the DEPTH and CORNER RADIUS data item.

Circle - Fixed figure : G1221


Data item Comment
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the circle
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the circle
R RADIUS Radius of the circle
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Not used in facing, so need not enter

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter the DEPTH data item.

3.3 POCKET MACHINING

3.3.1 Machining Type Block


Pocketing - Rough : G1040
Data item Comment
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Removal amount of pocket part, distance from the bottom of
pocket
J CUT DEPTH OF TOOL –AXIS Cutting depth of one cutting along the tool axis direction
(Z-axis)
H BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount of the bottom part
K SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount of the side wall part
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate along the tool axis (Z) direction
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
L CUT AMOUNT OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting amount of the tool radius direction
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching
point along Z-axis
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Carry out down cutting way
2 : Carry out up cut way
- 33 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

Pocketing - Bottom finish : G1041


Data item Comment
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Removal amount at bottom part
K SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount of the side wall part
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate along the tool axis (Z) direction
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
L CUT AMOUNT OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting amount of the tool radius direction
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Carry out down cutting way
2 : Carry out up cut way

Pocketing - Side finish : G1042


Data item Comment
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Removal amount at bottom part
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate along the tool axis (Z) direction
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
S CUTTER COMPENSATION NO. Offset number of cutter-R compensation
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching
point along Z-axis
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Carry out down cutting way
2 : Carry out up cut way
R APPROACH/ESCAPE RADIUS Arc radius of approaching and escaping motion

Pocketing - Chamfer : G1043


Data item Comment
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate along the tool axis (Z) direction
Z CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfering amount at the top of side wall part
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Carry out down cutting way
2 : Carry out up cut way
M APPROACH RADIUS Arc radius of approaching motion
K TOOL SMALL DIAMETER Diameter of the chamfering tool end part
H TOOL END CLEARANCE Clearance amount at the chamfering tool end part

Pocketing - Drilling : G1045


Data item Comment
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Removal amount of pocket part
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
R MACHINING TYPE 1 : Normal drilling with out dwell
3 : Peck drilling without dwell
Note) Type 2 and 4 are cannot be used.
F FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate
Q CUTTING DEPTH Cutting in depth of one cutting motion

NOTE
This cycle is used as pre-hole drilling before pocket machining.

- 34 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

3.3.2 Figure Block


Square - Fixed figure : G1220
Data item Comment
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the square
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the square
U LENGTH ALONG TO THE X-AXIS Length of square side along X-axis
W LENGTH ALONG TO THE Y-AXIS Length of square side along Y-axis
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Depth of pocket, distance from workpiece surface to the bottom of
pocket, usually negative value
A ANGLE Angle from X-axis
R CORNER RADIUS Radius of each corner of the square

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter the CORNER RADIUS data item, if the actual figure
need not it.

Circle - Fixed figure : G1221


Data item Comment
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the circle
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the circle
R RADIUS Radius of the circle
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Depth of pocket, distance from workpiece surface to the bottom of
pocket, usually negative value

Track - Fixed figure : G1222


Data item Comment
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the 1st circle
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the 1st circle
U DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTERS Distance between 1st circle center and 2nd circle center
R RADIUS Radius of the 2 circles (must be same radius)
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L DEPTH Depth of pocket, distance from workpiece surface to the bottom of
pocket, usually negative value
A ANGLE Angle from X-axis around the center of 1st circle

3.4 GROOVE MACHINING

3.4.1 Machining Type Block


Grooving - Rough : G1050
Data item Comment
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Removal amount of groove part, distance from the bottom of
groove
J CUT DEPTH OF TOOL –AXIS Cutting depth of one cutting along the tool axis direction (Z-axis)
H BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount of the bottom part
K SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount of the side wall part
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate along the tool axis (Z) direction
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
L CUT AMOUNT OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting amount of the tool radius direction
- 35 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

Data item Comment


C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Carry out down cutting way
2 : Carry out up cut way

Grooving - Bottom finish : G1051


Data item Comment
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Removal amount at bottom part
K SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount of the side wall part
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate along the tool axis (Z) direction
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
L CUT AMOUNT OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting amount of the tool radius direction
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Carry out down cutting way
2 : Carry out up cut way

Grooving - Side finish : G1052


Data item Comment
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Removal amount at bottom part
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate along the tool axis (Z) direction
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
S CUTTER COMPENSATION NO. Offset number of cutter-R compensation
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Carry out down cutting way
2 : Carry out up cut way
R APPROACH/ESCAPE RADIUS Arc radius of approaching and escaping motion

Grooving - Chamfer : G1053


Data item Comment
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate along the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate along the tool axis (Z) direction
Z CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfering amount at the top of side wall part
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Carry out down cutting way
2 : Carry out up cut way
M APPROACH RADIUS Arc radius of approaching motion
K TOOL SMALL DIAMETER Diameter of the chamfering tool end part
H TOOL END CLEARANCE Clearance amount at the chamfering tool end part

Grooving - Drilling : G1055


Data item Comment
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Removal amount of pocket part
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching point
along Z-axis
R MACHINING TYPE 1 : Normal drilling with out dwell
3 : Peck drilling without dwell
Note) Type 2 and 4 are cannot be used.
F FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate
Q CUTTING DEPTH Cutting in depth of one cutting motion

- 36 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

MILLING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

NOTE
This cycle is used as pre-hole drilling before groove machining.

3.4.2 Figure Block


Radial line grooves - Fixed figure : G1223
Data item Comment
U DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTERS Distance between 2 circle centers at the each end of groove
D GROOVE WIDTH Width of the groove
L DEPTH Depth of groove, distance from workpiece surface to the bottom of
pocket, usually negative value
E GROOVE ANGLE Angle of the groove
A ANGLE Angle of the 1st radial groove center point from X-axis
H CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) X-coordinate of center point of the plural radial grooves
V CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Y-coordinate of center point of the plural radial grooves
R GROOVE POSITION RADIUS Radius of arc on which plural radial grooves are positioned
B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
C PITCH ANGLE Center angle between 2 radial grooves
M NUMBER OF GROOVE Number of radial grooves

NOTE
1 Position of a 1st radial groove is calculated from CENTER POINT, GROOVE
POSITION RADIUS and ANGLE, so these data must be entered always.
2 If only one groove is necessary, PITCH ANGLE need not be entered.

- 37 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

IV. TURNING CYCLE


(LATHE SYSTEM)
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 1.MACHINING TYPE

1 MACHINING TYPE
MANUAL GUIDE 0i provides the following machining cycles.

Drilling
G1100 Center drilling
G1101 Drilling
Machining type
G1102 Tapping
block
G1103 Reaming
G1104 Boring
Turning
G1120 Outer Bar Roughing
G1121 Internal Bar Roughing
Machining type G1122 End Face Roughing
block G1123 Outer Bar Finishing
G1124 Internal Bar Finishing
G1125 End Face Finishing
G1400 Start
G1401 Line
Figure block G1402 Arc CW
G1403 Arc CCW
G1406 Figure End
Grooving
G1130 Outer Groove Roughing
G1131 Internal Groove Roughing
Machining type G1132 End face Groove Roughing
block G1133 Outer Groove Finishing
G1134 Inner Groove Finishing
G1135 End face Groove Finishing
G1460 Normal Groove
Figure block
G1461 Trapezoidal Groove
Threading
Machining type G1140 Outer Threading
block G1141 Inner Threading
Figure block G1450 Thread figure

- 41 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
2.OPERATING METHOD (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

2 OPERATING METHOD
Chapter 2, "OPERATING METHOD", consists of the following sections:

2.1 NEWLY CREATING A MACHINING CYCLE ...............................................................................42


2.1.1 Operating Method of Turning.................................................................................................42
2.1.2 Operating Method of Machining Other than Turning.............................................................44
2.2 EDITING A MACHINING CYCLE ..................................................................................................46

NOTE
1 When using this machining cycle, be sure to specify a command to move to the
cutting start point before a machining type block (see the next section).
Set the cutting start point to the position away from the figure start point by the
amount of clearance (the amount of tool-nose radius compensation or more).
2 When using this machining cycle, be sure to set parameters No. 9364, No. 9365,
No. 9381, and No.9382. For details on these parameters, see Appendix B,
"PARAMETERS".

2.1 NEWLY CREATING A MACHINING CYCLE


The method for newly creating a machining cycle is described below.

2.1.1 Operating Method of Turning


(1) Select turning with the corresponding soft key on the main menu screen. The machining menu
screen below is displayed.

(2) Select the desired machining type with the corresponding soft key. The data input screen of the
selected machining type block (when rough machining is selected) as shown below appears. For
details on the input items of each machining type block, see the next section. To cancel insertion,
press the leftmost soft key.

- 42 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 2.OPERATING METHOD

(3) When the necessary data is entered and soft key [FIGURE] is pressed, the turning figure menu
screen below is displayed.

When MDI page key [↓] is pressed, turning figure menu screen (2) below is displayed.

- 43 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
2.OPERATING METHOD (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

(a) When using method with calculating end point automatically


When [1 CONTOUR FIGURE] is selected on the BAR MACHINING FIGURE menu, a
free-format figure consisting of lines and arcs can be input using all functions of contour
calculation. For details, see Section 4.1 "”AUTOMATIC CALCULATING END POINT”
TYPE".

(b) When using method with entering end point directly


When any of items 2 to 6 is selected on the BAR MACHINING FIGURE menu, a figure block
can be entered directly. At this time, the figure is created so that G1400 (start) is entered first
and it ends with G1406 (figure end) finally. Therefore, the end coordinates and other necessary
values need to be input for each figure block. Contour calculation cannot be used. For details,
see Section 4.2 "”INPUTING DIRECTLY END POINT” TYPE".

(4) When a figure is selected with the corresponding soft key, a data input screen as shown below is
displayed. For details on the input items for each figure block, see the next section.

2.1.2 Operating Method of Drilling, Grooving, or Threading


Select the machining type (drilling, grooving, or threading) of a desired machining cycle on the main
menu screen with the corresponding soft key.

(Example of operating procedure)

(1) When, grooving is selected, the machining menu screen shown below is displayed.

(2) Select the desired machining type with the corresponding soft key. The data input screen of the
selected machining type block (when rough machining is selected) as shown below appears. For
details on the input items of each machining type block, see the next section. To cancel insertion,
press the leftmost soft key.

- 44 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 2.OPERATING METHOD

(3) When the necessary data is entered and soft key [FIGURE] is pressed, a figure menu screen as
shown below appears. Only the menu of figures that can be used in the machining type block entered
immediately before is displayed. The machining type block entered here is added to the machining
program.

(4) When a figure is selected with the corresponding soft key, an data input screen as shown below
appears (NORMAL GROOVE is selected in the following figure). For details on the input item of
each figure block, see the next section.

- 45 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
2.OPERATING METHOD (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

(5) When the necessary data has been entered, press soft key [NEXT F] or [END]. When [END] is
pressed, the entered figure block is added to the machining program and the main menu is displayed.
To enter a figure continuously, press [NEXT F]. Then, the entered figure block is added to the
machining program and the figure menu screen is displayed again.
To enter a machining type block and figure block and then add a figure block, press soft key
[FIGURE] on the main menu to display the figure menu screen and then select the necessary figure.

(6) To return to the CNC program screen, press the leftmost soft key on the main menu screen.

NOTE
When a machining type block and figure block are entered in a machining cycle
of MANUAL GUIDE 0i, these blocks must be paired.

2.2 EDITING A MACHINING CYCLE


Press function key [PROG] several times until soft key [C.A.P.] is displayed. To modify the machining
type clock and figure block of a machining cycle, move the cursor to a part other then EOB of the block
and press soft key [C.A.P.].
When the data input screen of the selected block is displayed, modify the necessary data and press soft
key [OK] to modify the machining program. Then, the CNC screen is displayed again.
If the leftmost soft key is pressed on the input data screen, modification of data is canceled and the CNC
screen is displayed again.

- 46 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

3 INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE


Chapter 3, "INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE", consists of the following sections:

3.1 DRILLING..........................................................................................................................................47
3.1.1 Machining Type Block ...........................................................................................................47
3.2 TURNING...........................................................................................................................................48
3.2.1 Machining Type Block ...........................................................................................................48
3.2.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................................49
3.3 GROOVING .......................................................................................................................................49
3.3.1 Machining Type Block ...........................................................................................................49
3.3.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................................51
3.4 THREADING .....................................................................................................................................52
3.4.1 Machining Type Block ...........................................................................................................52
3.4.2 Figure Block ...........................................................................................................................52

3.1 DRILLING

3.1.1 Machining Type Block


Center drilling : G1100
Data item Comment
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.
B START POINT Z-coordinate of cutting start point
L DEPTH Depth of hole (positive value)

Drilling : G1101
Data item Comment
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Drilling
2 : Peck drilling
4 : High speed peck drilling
F FEED RATTE Cutting in depth of one cutting motion
Q CUTTING DEPTH Cutting in depth of one cutting motion
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.
B START POINT Z-coordinate of cutting start point
L DEPTH Depth of hole (positive value)

Tapping : G1102
Data item Comment
W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Normal tapping
2 : Reverse tapping
3 : Rigid tapping
4 : Reverse rigid tapping
F THREAD PITCH Lead of a tapping thread
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.
B START POINT Z-coordinate of cutting start point
L DEPTH Depth of hole (positive value)

- 47 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

Reaming : G1103
Data item Comment
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate
Q CUTTING LIP LENGTH Cutting lip length of a reamer at cutting start end
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.
B START POINT Z-coordinate of cutting start point
L DEPTH Depth of hole (positive value)

Boring : G1104
Data item Comment
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate
Q SHIFT AMOUNT Shift in retraction for boring (positive value)
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec.
B START POINT Z-coordinate of cutting start point
L DEPTH Depth of hole (positive value)

3.2 TURNING

3.2.1 Machining Type Block


Outer Bar Roughing : G1120
Internal Bar Roughing : G1121
End Face Roughing : G1122
Data item Comment
P CUTTING DIRECTION 1 : Normal direction (from end face toward chuck)
2 : Reverse direction (from chuck toward end face)
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate
H FINISH AMOUNT X Finishing amount of X-axis direction (diameter)
K FINISH AMOUNT Z Finishing amount of Z-axis direction (radius)
Q 1ST CUTTING DEPTH Depth of 1st cut in rough machining (diameter)
E ESCAPE AMOUNT Movement along the X-axis (in outer/inner surface machining :
diameter) or along the Z-axis (in end facing : radius) for retraction after
cutting
W ESCAPE TYPE Escaping type after cutting in a roughing motions.
1 : Standard
The tool is retracted after cutting along the final figure outline
2 : Rapid
The tool is retracted immediately after cutting
I END FACE REMOVAL removal amount at the end face part (radius)
J RATE OF CUTTING DEPTH Ratio of the depth of an actual cut to the depth of cut entered by Q
U MINIMUM CUT DEPTH Limit of depth of cut (diameter)
V EDGE ANGLE Angle of the cutting edge. In case of that it was set to the value less
than 90 degrees, cutting edge compensation will be done
automatically.
A NOSE ANGLE Angle of the tool. In the case of that pocket figure was inputted as
contour figure, cutting back compensation will be done automatically.

Outer Bar Finishing : G1123


Internal Bar Finishing : G1124
End Face Bar Finishing : G1125
Data item Comment
P CUTTING DIRECTION 1 : Normal direction (from end face toward chuck)
2 : Reverse direction (from chuck toward end face)
- 48 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

Data item Comment


F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate
E ESCAPE AMOUNT Movement along the X-axis (in outer/inner surface machining :
diameter) or along the Z-axis (in end facing : radius) for retraction after
cutting
V EDGE ANGLE Angle of the cutting edge. In case of that it was set to the value less
than 90 degrees, cutting edge compensation will be done
automatically.
A NOSE ANGLE Angle of the tool. In the case of that pocket figure was inputted as
contour figure, cutting back compensation will be done automatically.

3.2.2 Figure Block


Refer to the chapter 4.”DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING ”.

3.3 GROOVING

3.3.1 Machining Type Block


(In Case of the parameter No.9302#4=1)
Outer Groove Roughing : G1130
Internal Groove Roughing : G1131
End face Groove Roughing : G1132

Data item Comment


F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate
E TOOL WIDTH Width of grooving tool at cutting edge (radius)
Q CUTTING DEPTH Depth of each cutting motion (outer/inner : diameter, end face :
radius)
R DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of grove, in unit of msec.
H FINISH AMOUNT X Finishing amount of X-axis direction (diameter)
K FINISH AMOUNT Z Finishing amount of Z-axis direction (radius)
W CUTTING METHOD Cutting sequence of groove part
1 : Single direction
Cutting is done from end face toward chuck side
2: Both direction
At first, cutting at the center of groove is done, and expanded to end
face side and chuck side mutually
J RATE OF CUTTING DEPTH Ratio of the depth of an actual cut to the depth of cut entered by Q
U MINIMUM CUT DEPTH Limit of depth of cut (diameter)

- 49 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

In case of the parameter No.9302#4=1, only Rouging is executed as follows.

Tool

Rough

work

(In Case of the parameter No.9302#4=0)


Outer Groove Roughing and Finishing : G1130
Internal Groove Roughing and Finishing : G1131
End face Groove Roughing and Finishing : G1132

Data item Comment


F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate
E TOOL WIDTH Width of grooving tool at cutting edge (radius)
Q CUTTING DEPTH Depth of each cutting motion (outer/inner : diameter, end face :
radius)
R DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of grove, in unit of msec.
H FINISH AMOUNT X Finishing amount of X-axis direction (diameter)
When Normal groove is specified, this data is ignored.
K FINISH AMOUNT Z Finishing amount of Z-axis direction (radius)
When Normal groove is specified, this data is ignored.
W CUTTING METHOD Cutting sequence of groove part
1 : Single direction
Cutting is done from end face toward chuck side
2: Both direction
At first, cutting at the center of groove is done, and expanded to end
face side and chuck side mutually
J RATE OF CUTTING DEPTH Ratio of the depth of an actual cut to the depth of cut entered by Q
U MINIMUM CUT DEPTH Limit of depth of cut (diameter)

In machining of normal groove, Finishing is executed after Rouging as follows. But, in machining of
trapezoidal groove, only Roughing is executed .

Tool
Finish

Rough

Work

- 50 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

Outer Groove Finishing : G1133


Internal Groove Finishing : G1134
End face Groove Finishing : G1135
Data item Comment
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate
E TOOL WIDTH Width of grooving tool at cutting edge (radius)
W CUTTING METHOD Cutting sequence of groove part
1 : Single direction
Cutting is done from end face toward chuck side
2: Both direction
At first, cutting at the center of groove is done, and expanded to end
face side and chuck side mutually

3.3.2 Figure Block


Normal Groove : G1460
Data item Comment
C CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfer amount of a groove (radius)
X START POINT X X-axis coordinate of a point where grooving starts
Z START POINT Z Z-axis coordinate of a point where grooving starts
U END POINT (X/Z-AXIS) X-axis or Z-axis coordinate of the end point of a groove. This data is
necessary only at the depth of a groove is different. If no value is
inputted, depth of start point and end point becomes equal. X value
is used at outer groove, and Z value is used at end face groove.
D GROOVE DEPTH Depth of a groove to be machine (radius)
W GROOVE WIDTH Width of a groove to be machined (radius)
M NUMBER OF GROOVE Number of grooves when more than one groove are to be machined
at regular intervals.
Y PITCH Distance between grooves when more than one groove are
machined. When minus value is entered, grooves will be positioned
from end face side toward chuck side. When plus value, it will be
reversed (radius)

Trapezoidal Groove : G1461


Data item Comment
X START POINT X X-axis coordinate of a start point
Z START POINT Z Z-axis coordinate of a start point
A END POINT-1 (X-AXIS) X-axis coordinate of a 1st line from start point
B END POINT-1 (Z-AXIS) Z-axis coordinate of a 1st line from start point
C CORNER R 1 Corner-R radius of the end point of line-1
D CHAMFER 1 Chamfering amount of the end point of line-1
E END POINT-2 (X-AXIS) X-axis coordinate of a 2nd line from 1st end point
F END POINT-2 (Z-AXIS) Z-axis coordinate of a 2nd line from 1st end point
H CORNER R 2 Corner-R radius of the end point of 2nd line
I CHAMFER 2 Chamfering amount of the end point of 2nd line
J END POINT-3 (X-AXIS) X-axis coordinate of a 3rd line from 2nd end point
K END POINT-3 (Z-AXIS) Z-axis coordinate of a 3rd line from 2nd end point
L CORNER R 3 Corner-R radius of the end point of 3rd line
T CHAMFER 3 Chamfering amount of the end point of 3rd line
P END POINT-4 (X-AXIS) X-axis coordinate of a 4th line from 3rd end point
Q END POINT-4 (Z-AXIS) Z-axis coordinate of a 4th line from 3rd end point
R CORNER R 4 Corner-R radius of the end point of 4th line
S CHAMFER 4 Chamfering amount of the end point of 4th line
V FINAL POINT (X-AXIS) X-axis coordinate of a 5th line from 4th end point
- 51 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

Data item Comment


W FINAL POINT (Z-AXIS) Z-axis coordinate of a 5th line from 4th end point
M NUMBER OF GROOVE Number of grooves when more than one groove are to be machined
at regular intervals.
Y PITCH Distance between grooves when more than one groove are
machined. When minus value is entered, grooves will be positioned
from end face side toward chuck side. When plus value, it will be
reversed

NOTE
When both of Corner R and Chamfering data are entered at the same time for
each point respectively, Corner R data is used and Chamfering data will be
neglected.

3.4 THREADING

3.4.1 Machining Type Block


Threading : G1140
Data item Comment
Q CUTTING DEPTH Depth of cut of the 1st pass (diameter)
J CUTTING TIMES Threading is repeated by this number including spark-out motion
W CUTTING METHOD 1 : Single side cutting, constant cutting amount
2 : Both side cutting, constant cutting amount
3 : Straight cutting, constant cutting amount
4 : Single side cutting, constant cutting depth
5 : Both side cutting, constant cutting depth
6 : Straight cutting, constant cutting depth
L SPARK OUT Number of finishing cutting to be done
H FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount (diameter)
C CLEARANCE X Clearance along the X-axis in threading (diameter)
M CLEARANCE Z Clearance amount along the Z-axis in threading, and it means the
distance required for the spindle to reach a stable speed (radius)
A NOSE ANGLE Tool tip angle used for only GENERAL thread

NOTE
When both of Cutting depth and Cutting number are entered at the same time,
Cutting depth data is used for actual threading motion, and Cutting number will
be neglected.

3.4.2 Figure Block


Thread figure : G1450
Data item Comment
R THREAD TYPE 1 : General thread
2 : Metric thread
3 : Unified thread
4 : PT thread
5 : PF thread
L THREADING LEAD Thread lead. The least increment is 0.0001mm or 0.000001inch.
This data is used for General, Metric, PT and PF thread.
N NUMBER OF THREAD PER 1 INCH Number of thread per 1 inch. The least input increment is 0.1.
This data is used for Unified thread only.
- 52 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 3.INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE

Data item Comment


H THREAD HEIGHT Thread height (radius)
P MULTI THREAD NUMBER Number of thread at multiple thread screw
X START POINT X X-coordinate of a thread start point
Z START POINT Z Z-coordinate of a thread start point
A END POINT 1 (X) X-coordinate of a 1st thread end point
B END POINT 1 (Z) Z-coordinate of a 1st thread end point
C END POINT 2 (X) X-coordinate of a 2nd continuous thread end point
D END POINT 2 (Z) Z-coordinate of a 2nd continuous thread end point
E END POINT 3 (X) X-coordinate of a 3rd continuous thread end point
F END POINT 3 (Z) Z-coordinate of a 3rd continuous thread end point
I END POINT 4 (X) X-coordinate of a 4th continuous thread end point
J END POINT 4 (Z) Z-coordinate of a 4th continuous thread end point
Q END POINT 5 (X) X-coordinate of a 5th continuous thread end point
S END POINT 5 (Z) Z-coordinate of a 5th continuous thread end point
V END POINT 6 (X) X-coordinate of a 6th continuous thread end point
W END POINT 6 (Z) Z-coordinate of a 6th continuous thread end point

NOTE
End point 2 to 6 are used at only when continuous thread machining under
General thread is selected.
When Metric, Unified, PT or PF is selected, only End point 1 is available.

- 53 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

4 DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING


The method of defining figure for turning is the following two.
(1) Automatic Calculating End Point” Type
(2) “Inputting End Point Directly” Type“

4.1 “AUTOMATIC CALCULATING END POINT” TYPE


In this programming method, end point of figure is calculated automatically.

4.1.1 Start-up Method


Press soft key [1] on the page 1/2 of “Bar Machining Figure Menu” screen.

[ 1 ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

After the soft key [1] is pressed, the screen for defining Start Point is displayed.

4.1.2 Selecting Method of Editing The Turning Figure


If turning figure is existing, when soft key [1] is depressed, the following initial screen is displayed.
An operator can select whether a new turning figure is to be created, or whether an existing one is to be
edited.

When you want to create a new turning figure, press soft key [NEW]. To work with an existing turning
figure, press soft key [EDIT].

SELECT METHOD TO EDIT CONTOUR PROGRAM

CONTOUR PROGRAM IS EXISTING


[NEW]: CREATE NEW PROGRAM.
[EDIT]: EDIT EXISTED PROGRAM.

[ NEW ] [ EDIT ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

After the soft key [NEW] is pressed, input data screen of Start Point is displayed.
After the soft key [EDIT] is pressed, program list screen is displayed.

NOTE
In figure programming, a temporary working program must be allocated to hold a
temporary NC program. A program number of this temporary program should be
set in parameter No.9330 using a non-zero value. In this manual, all
explanations assume that 9999 is set.

- 54 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

4.1.3 Method of Creating of turning Figure


(1) Start point
In case of creating of turning figure, after the operation explained in the section 4.1.1 or 4.1.2, the data
input screen of Start Point is displayed.
In this screen, the following soft keys are displayed.

[ AUX ] [ ] [ ] [ OK ] [ EXIT ]

[AUX.] : Call auxiliary calculating screen. The result of it will be set into start point coordinate data.
[OK] : Fix start point data and store into memory.
[EXIT] : Cancel start point entering and exit from contour programming.

(2) Select type of turning figure


After the start point is defined, program list screen is displayed. On the program list screen, the following
figure selecting or other operating soft-key will be displayed. In this screen operations for turning figure
entering can be done.

[ LINE ] [ARC ] [ARC ] [CORNER] [CHAMF.]

By pushing right end soft-key, next soft-key page will be displayed.

[MODIFY] [RECALC] [GRAPH ] [NC CNV] [ STOP ]

[LINE] : Select a LINE


[ARC ] : Select a CW arc
[ARC ] : Select a CCW arc
[CORNER] : Select a corner-R
[CHAMF.] : Select a chamfering
[MODIFY] : A data entering menu screen for each figure is displayed, and can be used for modifying a
data that was previously entered.
[RECALC] : Calculation for whole turning figures is done again, and must be done after modifying a
part of turning figures or entering new figure.
[GRAPH] : Figure drawing screen is displayed, and can be used for checking the entered figure.
Enlarging, scale-down and others are available.
[NC CNV] : Convert entered turning figures into NC motion program.
After finishing conversion, a programming of turning figure will be finished and exit to
former screen.
[STOP] : Stop a programming of turning figure and after replying the prompt of it, it can exit to
former screen. NC program will be never made.

NOTE
During a programming of turning figure, only line / arc / chamfering / corner-R on
an XZ-plane can be entered.

(3) Modify turning figures


There are two ways of modifying turning figure data that has already been fixed and stored.

- 55 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

(a) Method 1
Use a figure block data input screen
On the turning figure list screen, position the cursor to the figure block that is to be modified, and then
press [MODIFY]. The figure block data input screen corresponding to the selected figure is displayed,
allowing you to enter new data. Enter the required new data and then press [OK]. Then, press [RECALC]
to calculate all of the contour figures by using the newly entered data.

(b) Method 2
Modify the data directly on the turning figure list screen
On the turning figure list screen, position the cursor to the figure block that is to be modified, enter a new
value, and then press key.
Then, press [RECALC] to calculate all of the turning figures by using the newly entered data.

NOTE
To clear a data entry, press key and then key.

(4) Insert a new figure block


Position the cursor to the figure block immediately before the position where a new figure should be
inserted. Then, using the procedure described in examples 2 and 3, enter new figure block.
Then, press [RECALC] to calculate all of the contour figures using the newly entered data.

(5) Delete a figure block


Position the cursor to the head of the figure block or figure symbol to be deleted, and then press
key. The prompt "ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE BLOCK?" will appear. Press [YES] to delete the figure.
Press [NO] to abandon the deletion.
Then, press [RECALC] to calculate all of the contour turning figures using the newly entered data.

(6) Change a figure block


To change the figure type of a previously input contour figure, first delete the old figure block, and then
insert a new figure block.

(7) Checking the turning figures


Entered turning figures can be checked on the screen by means of operations such as zooming-in,
zooming-out, and so on.
On the turning figure list screen, press [GRAPH]. The graphic drawing screen shown below will appear.
A drawing scale appears at the bottom of the screen.

[LARGE ] [SMALL ] [ AUTO ] [ REAL ] [RETURN]

Pressing the right-end soft-key causes the next soft-key page to appear.

[ ← ] [ → ] [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] [CENTER]

[LARGE] : Double a scale factor.


[SMALL] : Make a scale factor half.
[AUTO] : Decide a scale factor automatically in order to draw a whole part within a screen.
[REAL] : Draw turning figures in real scale.
[RETURN] : Return to the turning figure list screen.
[←] [→] [↑] [↓] : Move a view point to each direction. Cursor key can be used also to move.
[CENTER] : Move a drawing figure at the center of a screen.

- 56 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

(8) Output to NC program


Entered turning figures can be outputted to NC programs in the form of G-code.
Press [NC CNV]. The following screen appears.

CONFIRM CONVERSION OF NC PROGRAM

YOU CAN SELECT NC CONVERSION TYPE

PUSH [YES] WITH NO DATA INPUT


→ NC PROGRAM WILL BE ENTERED TO ACTUAL PROGRAM

ENTER SUB PROGRAM NUMBER, THEN PUSH [YES]


→ NC PROGRAM WILL BE ENTERED AS A SUB PROGRAM

[ YES ] [ NO ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

By following the message displayed on the screen, press [YES] immediately or press it after entering a
sub program number.
If you press [YES] without entering a sub program number, the contour figures will be entered
immediately after the cursor before the start of Contour programming.
If you press [YES] after entering a new sub program number, the contour figure will be entered into the
newly made sub program, and a sub-program calling block such as M98 Pxxxx will be entered
immediately after the cursor before the start of Contour programming.
By pressing [NO], you can abandon the conversion operation.
Contour figures can be converted to the following G-code programs.

Type of Figure Symbol G-code


Start point n G1400
Line → G1401
Arc (CW) G1402
Arc (CCW) G1403
Corner R R G1402 or G1403
Chamfering C G1401

NOTE
1 Converted NC program blocks are stored immediately after the block to which
the cursor was positioned.
After a return to these previous screens, the cursor will be positioned to the head
of the NC program that was newly stored after conversion.
2 If there are any figures for which the end points are pending, NC program
conversion will be done for the contour figure immediately before the pending
block.
3 A value of up to eight digits can be entered for the axis command (X/Z) of a
converted NC program, and the value must always have a decimal point. The
decimal digits conform to the minimum setting units, with any lower digits being
rounded off.

(1) IS-B form


Least input increment Least command increment Max.
mm 0.001 mm 0.001 mm ±99999.999 mm
inch 0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch ±9999.9999 inch
- 57 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

NOTE
4 By setting bit 0 (IKR) of parameter No.9341 to 1, address "R" is output as the
radius data of arc n. By setting it to 0, data "I" and "K" are output as center point
coordinates.
5 Even if data having the same value is output continuously for a given address,
they will never be canceled.

4.1.4 Input Method of Figure Block


This chapter details figure block data to be entered on the figure block data input screen.
The contour figure data of a start point and straight line is described in detail in the previous chapter. See
the previous chapter if necessary.

(1) START POINT


Start : G1400
Data item Comment
X START POINT (X-AXIS) X-axis coordinate of figure start point
Z START POINT (Z-AXIS) Z-axis coordinate of figure start point

The following soft keys are displayed.


[AUX.] : Call auxiliary calculating screen. The result of it will be set into start point coordinate data.
[OK] : Fix start point entering and store into memory.
[EXIT] : Cancel start point entering and exit from programming of turning figure.

(2) LINE
Line : G1401
If you select a line, the line screen is displayed, allowing you to enter the figure data written on a
drawing.
Even if the end point is not input, it can be determined by calculating the cross point coordinate between
this figure and that to be entered next.
Data item Comment
END POINT X X coordinate of a line end point
END POINT Z Z coordinate of a line end point
ANGLE A Angle of line from +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.
TOUCH STATE Select from the following soft-key menu whether tangential or not between
neighbor figure.
[NO] : Not tangential
[LAST] :Tangential with the preceding figure

[AUX.] : Call auxiliary calculating screen. The result of it will be set into end point coordinate or
angle data.
[OK] : Fix line figure entering and store into memory.
[CANCEL] : Cancel line figure entering and return to the turning figure list screen.

(3) ARC
Arc CW : G1402
Arc CCW : G1403
Data item Comment
END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point
END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
RADIUS R Radius of an arc, but plus value only

- 58 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

Data item Comment


CENTER I X coordinate of an arc center
CENTER K Z coordinate of an arc center
TOUCH STATE Select from the following soft-key menu whether tangential or not between
neighbor figure.
[NO] : Not tangential
[LAST] :Tangential with the preceding figure

NOTE
When entering the coordinates of an arc end point, do not round off the
calculated value.

The following soft keys are displayed.


[AUX.] : Call auxiliary calculating screen. The result of it will be set into start point coordinate data.
[OK] : Fix arc figure entering and store into memory.
[CANCEL] : Cancel arc figure entering and return to the turning figure list screen.

(4) CORNER R
Corner R CW : G1402
Corner R CCW : G1403
Data item Comment
RADIUS R Radius of a corner R, but plus value only

The following soft keys are displayed.


[OK] : Fix corner R figure entering and store into memory.
[CANCEL] : Cancel corner R figure entering and return to the turning figure list screen.

(5) CHAMFERING
Chamfering : G1401
Data item Comment
CAMFER C Chamfering amount, but plus value only

The following soft keys are displayed.


[OK] : Fix chamfering figure entering and store into memory.
[CANCEL] : Cancel chamfering figure entering and return to the turning figure list screen.

(6) SELECT CROSSING POINT OF FIGURE


During the calculation of a contour figure, such as between a line and an arc for example, there may be
cases in which two or more cross points or figures are possible. In this case, the screen for selecting a
cross point or figure appears.

The following soft keys are displayed.


[PREV.]/[NEXT] : Cross point or figure should be selected is changed. The active one blinks among
some figures should be selected.
[OK] : Select an active figure, blinking, finally.
[CANCEL] : Cancel a selecting operation. And then, store the actual figure into memory still
keeping it in pending.

(7) FIGURE END


Figure End : G1406
No data is necessary in this figure block. And it’s not necessary for an operator to program figure end
because figure end block is created automatically when figure data is outputted to NC.

- 59 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

4.1.5 Automatic Calculation of Figure Block


This chapter explains the details of automatic calculations of figure block, such as those for cross points
or tangential points, that is supported by contour programming.
A figure block for which an end point has not yet been determined is said to be in the pending state. A
pending figure block is indicated by a dotted line.
On the screen for entering figure block, more data input items than required will appear. These data items
are used to calculate the cross points with the immediately preceding pending figure block, and also to
calculate the end point.
Ten successive figure blocks can be specified as pending blocks.

NOTE
It is impossible to enter successive straight lines with only their angles specified.
(They are not assumed to be pending blocks.)

4.1.5.1 LINE
(1) When the preceding figure is not pending
(a) Only X is inputted
→ This line is determined as a vertical line.
(b) Only Z is inputted
→ This line is determined as a horizontal line.
(c) A and either X or Z are inputted
→ The end point that is not inputted is calculated.

X,Z

(2) When the preceding figure specifying an arc is not pending, and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in
the line.
(a) Either X or Z is inputted
→ The angle A is calculated automatically, and an end point is determined.
If neither X nor Z is inputted, this line will be pending.

A(Automatically calculated)

X, Z

- 60 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

(3) When the preceding figure is pending, and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in the line.
(a) Both X and Z, and A are inputted
→ The cross point between the preceding figure is calculated.

Cross point

X, Z

When the preceding figure is an arc, the cross point selection screen is displayed, so select
a necessary one.

(4) When the preceding figure is pending arc, and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in the line.
It is assumed that the radius and the center point coordinate (I,K) of arc have already inputted.
(a) Only A is inputted
→ The tangential point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one.
This line will be pending.
Tangential point

A Tangential point

(b) Both X and Z are inputted


→ The tangential point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one.
This line will be determined.
Tangential
point

Tangential
point

(c) A and either X or Z are inputted


→ The tangential point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one.
This line will be determined.
Tangential point

Tangential
A point
X, Z
If the positional relationship between the tangential point and the line is such that an
inputted A conflicts with the inputted X or Z, a warning message is displayed to indicate
that invalid data has been inputted.
- 61 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

4.1.5.2 ARC
(1) When the preceding figure is not pending, and "TOUCH LAST" is not specified in the arc.
(a) I and K are inputted.
→ This arc will be pending.
(b) X, Z, and R are inputted.
→ A short path arc is uniquely defined.
(c) X, Z, I, and K are inputted.
→ A short path arc is uniquely defined.
NOTE
If the distance (radius) between the start point and center differs from the end point and
center, the figure is displayed based on the actual form, and the actual figure will not be
machined correctly.

(d) Only R is inputted


→ By specifying "TOUCH LAST" and inputting a line with A=0 degree and X coordinate as
an immediately after figure, this arc can be determined.

Tangential point

(2) When the preceding figure is not pending, and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in the arc.
(a) X and Z are inputted.
→ The radius is automatically calculated and this arc will be determined.
Tangential point

End point X, Z

(3) When the preceding figure is pending (foe which the start point has been determined), and "TOUCH
LAST" is not specified in this arc
(a) R, I, and K are inputted.
→ The cross point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one. This arc will be
pending.
Cross point

Cross point R

Center I, K

- 62 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

(b) X, Z, I, and K are inputted.


→ The cross point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one. This arc will be
determined.
Cross point

Cross point

End point Center I, K


X, Z

(4) When the preceding figure is pending (for which the start point has been determined), and "TOUCH
LAST" is specified in the arc
(a) R, I, and K are inputted.
→ The tangential point is calculated, and this arc will be pending.

Tangential point

Center I, K

(b) X, Z, I , and K are inputted.


→ The tangential point is calculated, and this arc will be determined.

Tangential point

End point
Center I, K
X, Z

NOTE
If the distance (radius) between the start point and center differs from the end point and
center, the figure is displayed based on the actual form, and the actual figure will not be
machined correctly.

(c) R, X, and Z are inputted.


→ The tangential point is calculated and a short path arc is uniquely defined.
Tangential Tangential
point point

Long path Short path arc


arc R
R
End point X, Z

- 63 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

(5) When the preceding figure "arc" is pending (for which the start point has been determined and only
R is to be inputted), and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in the arc.
(a) R, X, and Z are inputted.
→ The tangential point is calculated and a short path arc is uniquely defined.

R1
Tangential
Long path arc point
Tangential
point
Short path arc
R2
End point X, Z

(b) R, X, and Z are inputted.


→ The tangential point is calculated and a short path arc is uniquely defined.

R1

Tangential End point


point
Center Short path arc
I, K
R2 Tangential
point R1

Long path arc

4.1.5.3 LINE TANGENTIAL TO TWO ARCS

(2)

(2)
Center of (3)
I3, K3 Center of (1)
I1, K1
(2) Start point
R3
of (1)
(2)

By inputting three successive figures as follows, line (2) that is tangential to two arcs can be specified as
shown in the above drawing. The end points of (1) and (2) are determined, while (3) is left pending.
Among the above four possible lines, depending on the direction of the two arcs, the line that makes the
smoothest connection to the arcs is automatically selected.

- 64 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

Arc (1) :
I and K are inputted. (A start point is determined. This arc is pending.)
Line (2) :
Only "TOUCH LAST" is inputted.
Arc (3) :
R, I and K are inputted.

4.1.5.4 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO BOTH CROSSING LINES AND


ARCS

(1)
(1)
(2) Tangential point
(2) Tangential point
R
Tangential point R

(3) (1)
(3)

(2) Tangential point


(3)

R
Tangential point

By inputting three successive figures as follows, arc (2) that is tangential to two lines or arcs can be
specified as shown in the above drawing. The end points of (1) and (2) are determined, while (3) is left
pending. When (3) is a line, it is determined.

Line (1) or Arc (1) :


Line that is pending (for which A is inputted and the start point has been determined), or Arc that is
pending (for which I and K are inputted and the start point has been determined)
Arc (2) :
R and "TOUCH LAST" are inputted.
Line (3) or Arc (3) :
Line with A, X and, or Arc with R, I, K and "TOUCH LAST"

When either figure (1) or (3) is an arc, or when both of them are arcs, the selection screen for multiple
arcs is displayed, so select a suitable one.

- 65 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

4.1.5.5 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING LINE AND ARC

(3)
(1)

Tangential
Tangential
point R
point

(2)

By inputting three successive figures as follows, arc (2) that is tangential to line (1) and arc (3) that do not
cross, can be specified as shown in the above drawing. The end points of (1) and (2) are determined,
while (3) is left pending.
Among the multiple possible arcs shown above, the arc that makes the smoothest connection to line (1)
and arc (3) is automatically selected. But, even though a "Long path arc" and "Short path arc" remain,
select whichever is necessary from the selection screen.

Line (1) :
Line that is pending (for which A is inputted and the start point has been determined)
Arc (2) :
R and "TOUCH LAST" are inputted.
Arc (3) :
Arc with R, I and K

4.1.5.6 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING 2 ARCS

Start
(3) point
(1)

R3 Center
Tangential I1, K1
point R
Center Tangential
I3, K3 (2) point

By inputting three successive figures as follows, arc (2) that is tangential to arcs (1) and (3) that do not
cross can be specified as shown in the above drawing.
The end points of (1) and (2) are determined, while (3) is left pending.
Among the multiple possible arcs shown above, the arc that makes the smoothest connection to arcs (1)
and (3) is automatically selected. But, even though a "Long path arc" and "Short path arc" remain, select
whichever is necessary from the selection screen.

Arc (1) :
Arc with I and K, and it is pending (for which the start point has been determined)
Arc (2) :
R and "TOUCH LAST" are inputted.
Arc (3) :
Arc with R, I, and K

- 66 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

4.1.6 Auxiliary Calculation


This chapter explains the details of the auxiliary calculation.
By using this auxiliary calculation, the coordinates of a point or the angle of a line can be determined.
Furthermore, the figure block, such as the amount of shift from the original form for a tool radius can be
entered easily.

(1) Data items in which auxiliary calculation can be used


(a) Start point
- Coordinate (X, Z) of start point
(b) Line
- Coordinate (X, Z) of end point
- Angle of a line (A)
(c) Arc
- Coordinate (X, Z) of end point
- Coordinate (I, K) of center
- Specifying an arc

(2) Calculation type available in auxiliary calculation


(a) Calculation of coordinate
- A point specified by polar coordinate
- A point specified by a point, angle and distance
- A point specified by rotating a point
- Neighbor point of a line
- Cross point between 2 lines
- Cross point between line and arc
- Cross point between 2 arcs
(b) Calculation of angle
- Angle of the line passes 2 points
- Angle of a line rectangular to the line passes 2 points
(c) Specify an arc (Center and radius)
- An arc passes 1 point and its center coordinate has been determined
- An arc passes 2 points and its radius has been determined
- An arc passes 3 points

- 67 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

4.1.6.1 START POINT


(1) Selecting type of calculation
On the data-entry screen for a start point, press [AUX.]. The following calculation type menu screen will
appear.
By pressing the cursor key, scroll through the menu comments until you find the one to select.

SELECT CALCULATION OF START POINT

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7.

1. POINT BY POLAR COORD.

[ ][ ][ ][ OK ][CANCEL ]

The following soft keys are displayed.


[OK] : Use the active calculation type
[CANCEL] : Cancel selecting operations and return to the previous screen

NOTE
When bit 5 (AUX) of parameter No.9305 is set to 1, the menu for auxiliary
calculation is displayed as shown above. By setting it to 0, the menu is displayed
as a list of comments for each calculation type.
This parameter is available for other auxiliary calculation menus.

(2) Entering data for calculation

(a) A point specified by polar coordinate


Data item Comment
DIST. D Distance between the point and work coordinate origin
ANGLE A Angle of line from +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.

(b) A point specified by a point, angle and distance


Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the base point
POINT Z Z coordinate of the base point
DIST. D Distance between the point and the base point
ANGLE A Angle of line from +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.

- 68 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

(c) A point specified by rotating a point


Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the base point
POINT Z Z coordinate of the base point
CENTER I X coordinate of the rotating center
CENTER K Z coordinate of the rotating center
ANGLE A Angle of line from +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.

(d) Neighbor point of a line


You can determine the nearest point to the line. Furthermore, you can determine the nearest point to the
line that has been moved through a specific distance.
This can be useful for determining the end point of an approaching motion from a certain point close to
the line.

(1) When specifying a line with one point and an angle


Data item Comment
BASE POINT X X coordinate of the base point positioned apart from a line
BASE POINT Z Z coordinate of the base point positioned apart from a line
PASS POINT U X coordinate of a certain point on the line
PASS POINT W Z coordinate of a certain point on the line
ANGLE A Angle of line from +X or +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

(2) When specifying a line with two points


By pressing soft key [XZ,XZ], you can specify a line with two passing points.
By pressing soft key [XZ, A], you can select the above type by using an angle again.
Data item Comment
BASE POINT X X coordinate of the base point positioned apart from a line
BASE POINT Z Z coordinate of the base point positioned apart from a line
PASS POINT U X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT W Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT P X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
PASS POINT Q Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
distance
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

(e) Cross point between 2 lines


The cross point of two lines can be calculated. Furthermore, this calculation can also be done for a line
that is shifted from its original position by some distance.
This can be useful when entering a tool path that is shifted from the original figure by an amount equal to
the tool radius.

(1) When specifying a line with one point and an angle


Initially, the following data items are displayed for Line-1.
Data item Comment
PASS POINT X X coordinate of a certain point on the line
BASE POINT Z Z coordinate of a certain point on the line
ANGLE A Angle of line from +X or +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
Distance
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

- 69 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

By pressing [NEXT] after entering the necessary data, a similar data item screen for Line-2 is
displayed. By pressing [PREV.], you can return to the previous screen for Line-1.

(2) When specifying a line with two points


By pressing soft key [XZ,XZ], you can specify a line with two passing points.
By pressing soft key [XZ, A], you can select the above type by using an angle again.
The following data items are displayed respectively for Line-1 and Line-2.
Data item Comment
PASS POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT Z Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
PASS POINT W Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

(f) Cross point between line and arc


The cross point between a line and arc can be calculated. For the line, one that has been shifted through
some distance can be used for the calculation.
This is useful for entering a tool path that has been shifted from the original figure by an amount equal to
the tool radius.

(1) When specifying a line with one point and an angle


Initially, the following data items are displayed for the Line.
Data item Comment
PASS POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT Z Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
ANGLE A Angle of line from +X or +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

By pressing [NEXT] after entering the necessary data, the following screen for the Arc is displayed.
By pressing [PREV.], you can return to the previous screen for the Line.
By pressing [NEXT] after entering the necessary data, a similar data item screen for Line-2 is
displayed. By pressing [PREV.], you can return to the previous screen for Line-1.
Data item Comment
CENTER I X coordinate of an arc center
CENTER K Z coordinate of an arc center
RADIUS R Radius of an arc, but plus value only
SELECT Select necessary cross point from two possible points by arrow soft-keys

(2) When specifying a line with two points


By pressing [XZ,XZ], you can specify a line with two passing points.
By pressing [XZ, A], you can select the above type using an angle again.
Data item Comment
PASS POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT Z Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
PASS POINT W Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
distance
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

Data screen for the arc is displayed quite similar to the case of (1).

- 70 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

(g) Cross point between 2 arcs


On the screen as shown below, data for two arcs can be entered and the cross point between them can be
calculated.
Data item Comment
CENTER X1 X coordinate of an arc-1 center
CENTER Z1 Z coordinate of an arc-1 center
RADIUS R1 Radius of an arc-1, but plus value only
CENTER X2 X coordinate of an arc-2 center
CENTER Z2 Z coordinate of an arc-2 center
RADIUS R2 Radius of an arc-2, but plus value only
SELECT Select necessary cross point from two possible points by arrow soft-keys

(3) Execution of auxiliary calculation


After entering all of the necessary data for each of the above calculation types, press [OK]. The auxiliary
calculation is done, and then the result is entered into the coordinate data item (X, Z) of the start point.
By pressing [CANCEL], you can return to the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

4.1.6.2 LINE
As part of the auxiliary calculation for a line, the end point coordinate and angle can be calculated.
The following soft-keys are displayed on the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

[ENDPNT] : Menu screen for end point calculation is displayed


[ANGLE] : Menu screen for angle calculation is displayed

For the end point calculation, these items are similar to those for the start point, so refer to the preceding
explanation.

(1) Selecting type of calculation


On the menu screen for the auxiliary calculation of a line, press [ANGLE]. The following menu screen
for angle calculation appears.
By pressing the cursor key, you can scroll through the menu comments until you find the type that you
want to select.

SELECT CALCULATION OF ANGLE (LINE)

1. 2.

1. ANGLE OF LINE

[ ENDPT ][ ANGLE ][ ][ OK ][CANCEL ]

(2) Entering data for calculation

(a) Angle of the line passes 2 points


Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
- 71 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

Data item Comment


POINT Z Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line, this should be apart from the
1st point
POINT W Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line, this should be apart from the
1st point

(b) Angle of a line rectangular to the line passes 2 points


The angle of a line that is rectangular to a line and which passes through two points can be calculated.
Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
POINT Z Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line, this should be apart from the
1st point
POINT W Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line, this should be apart from the
1st point

(3) Execution of auxiliary calculation


After entering all of the necessary data for each of the above calculation types, press [OK]. The auxiliary
calculation is performed, after which the result is entered into the end point coordinate (X, Z) or angle (A)
of the line.
By pressing [CANCEL], you can return to the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

4.1.6.3 ARC
As part of the auxiliary calculation for an arc, the end point coordinate and center coordinate can be
calculated. Furthermore, the arc itself can be specified by entering the likes of three passing points.
The following soft-keys are displayed on the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

[ENDPNT] : Menu screen for end point calculation is displayed


[CENTER] : Menu screen for center point calculation is displayed
[CIRCLE] : Menu screen for circle specifying is displayed

For the end point and center point calculation, they are quite similar to those for the start point case, so
refer to the preceding explanation.

- 72 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

(1) Selecting type of calculation


On the menu screen for auxiliary calculation of an arc, press [CIRCLE]. The following menu screen for
specifying a circle is displayed.
By pressing the cursor keys, you can scroll through the menu items until you find the item that you want
to select. The currently selected item is highlighted in yellow.

SELECT CALCULATION OF CIRCLE (ARC )

1. 2. 3.

1. CIRCLE BY CENT. & POINT

[ ENDPNT ][ CENTER ][ CIRCLE ][ OK ][CANCEL ]

(2) Entering data for calculation

(a) An arc passes 1 point and its center coordinate has been determined
Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of a certain point on the arc
POINT Z Z coordinate of a certain point on the arc
CENTER I X coordinate of an arc center
CENTER K Z coordinate of an arc center

(b) An arc passes 2 points and its radius has been determined
Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the arc
POINT Z Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the arc
POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points
POINT W Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points
RADIUS R Radius of the arc, but plus value only
SELECT Select necessary one from two possible arcs by arrow soft-keys

(c) An arc passes 3 points


Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the arc
POINT Z Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the arc
POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points
POINT W Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points
POINT P X coordinate of the 3rd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points
POINT Q Z coordinate of the 3rd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points

- 73 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING (LATHE SYSTEM) B-64434EN/02

(3) Execution of auxiliary calculation


After entering all the necessary data for each of the above calculation types, press [OK]. The auxiliary
calculation is performed, after which the result is entered into the end point coordinate (X, Z) or center
point coordinate (I, K) of an arc.
When circle specification is selected by [CIRCLE], the radius and center point coordinate are calculated
and the results are entered into these data items.

By pressing [CANCEL], you can return to the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

4.1.6.4 OTHERS
(1) Calculation of Inputting Data
When entering data on the figure block data input screen, calculation as shown below can be made as in a
desktop calculator.

Addition :
10+10 → 20

Subtraction :
10-10 → 0

Multiplication :
10*10 → 100

Division :
10/10 → 1

SIN :
S30 → 0.5

COS :
C60 → 0.5

TAN :
T45 → 1

Square root :
R9 → 3

NOTE
1 For + - * /, more than two terms cannot be handled at once. The third and
subsequent terms are neglected. So, 1 + 2 + 3 will be calculated as 1 +2.
2 The calculation of SIN, COS, TAN and Square root can be done as only
independent calculations. The second and subsequent terms, if specified, will be
neglected. C60 + S60 will be calculated as C60 only.
Calculation based on previously input data is also possible.

- 74 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

TURNING CYCLE
B-64434EN/02 (LATHE SYSTEM) 4.DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING

(2) Notes
NOTE
1 No more than thirty figure blocks can be creating for turning figure.
2 During creating of turning figure, if the screen is changed to another ones by the
user pressing the likes of a function button, the active screen displayed in
creating screen of turning figure will be forced to close.
3 When editing the turning figures, keep the following in mind.
(1) The turning figures that was operated one or more times cannot be edited.
(2) After creating the turning figures, another turning figure cannot be newly
entered.

4.2 “INPUTING DIRECTLY END POINT” TYPE


In this programming method, an operator inputs directly the end point of figure.

4.2.1 Start-up Method


Press soft key [2] through [6] on the page 2/2 of “Bar Machining Figure Menu” screen, select data input
screen for defining figure.

[ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] [ 5 ] [ 6 ]

[2] : Select Start Point data input screen


[3] : Select Line data input screen
[4] : Select Arc (CW) data input screen
[5] : Select Arc (CCW) data input screen
[6] : Select Figure End data input screen

4.2.2 Method of Creating Figure


(1) On the figure data input screen, enter the figure data such as end point and radius.
(2) After inputting data, press the soft key [OK].
Refer to section “3.2.2 Figure Block” about the details of each figure data.
(3) After completing enter figure data, press the soft key [6] for displaying Figure End screen.
(4) Press the soft key [OK] without inputting data.

Figure block has to be specified as follows.


In beginning block of figure, G1400(Start Point) has to be specified. In last block of figure, 1406(Figure
End) has to be specified.

- 75 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

V. CONTOUR PROGRAMMING
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 1.OPERATING METHOD

1 OPERATING METHOD
Follow the operating method below to create a contour program.

(1) Calling the contour programming screen


(2) Selecting the method of editing a contour program
(3) Creating a contour program
(4) Checking a contour program
(5) Conversion to NC programs

These operations are described below.

Chapter 1, "OPERATING METHOD", consists of the following sections:

1.1 CALLING CONTOUR PROGRAMMING SCREEN .......................................................................79


1.2 SELECTING OF METHOD TO EDIT OF CONTOUR PROGRAM ...............................................80
1.3 CREATING A CONTOUR PROGRAM............................................................................................80
1.4 CHECKING CONTOUR PROGRAMS .............................................................................................82
1.5 CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM ........................................................................................................82

1.1 CALLING CONTOUR PROGRAMMING SCREEN


(1) When a program is created with G01/G02/G03
Press soft key [CONTUR] on page 2 of the main menu screen.

[PROCESS] [G CODE] [M CODE] [CYCLE ] [CONTUR]

(2) When the figure block of a turning cycle is entered


Press soft key [1] (contour figure) on the turning cycle figure menu screen.

[ 1 ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

In both cases, the contour program initial screen will be displayed.

NOTE
When you are going to enter figure blocks for the Stock removal cycle, you can
either enter them directly immediately after the machining type block, or enter
them as a sub program.
The latter is useful when the same contour figure is used both for roughing and
finishing. First, you can enter the figure blocks as the sub program for roughing,
and then you need only enter a sub program that calls a block such as M98
Pxxxx.
For details on the operation, refer to Section 1.5 “CONVERT TO NC
PROGRAM”.

- 79 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

1.OPERATING METHOD CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

1.2 SELECTING OF METHOD TO EDIT OF CONTOUR


PROGRAM
Pressing soft key [CONTUR] (or soft key [1]) causes the initial screen for contour programming to be
displayed.
After the contour programming operation screen, the next screen appears to allow the user to select
whether a new program is to be created, or whether an existing one is to be edited.

When you want to create a new program, press soft key [NEW]. To work with an existing program,
press soft key [EDIT].
SELECT METHOD TO EDIT CONTOUR PROGRAM

CONTOUR PROGRAM IS EXISTING


[NEW]: CREATE NEW PROGRAM.
[EDIT]: EDIT EXISTED PROGRAM.

[ NEW ] [ EDIT ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

NOTE
In contour programming, a temporary working program must be allocated to hold
a temporary NC program. A program number of this temporary program should
be set in parameter No.9330 using a non-zero value. In this manual, all
explanations assume that 9999 is set.

1.3 METHOD OF CREATING A CONTOUR PROGRAM


(1) Start point
As the data item screen for the start point will be displayed, enter the start point.

(2) Select type of contour figure


During contour programming, the following contour figure selecting or other operating soft-key will be
displayed. In this screen operations for contour figure entering can be done.

[ LINE ] [ARC ] [ARC ] [CORNER] [CHAMF.]

By pushing right end soft-key, next soft-key page will be displayed.

[MODIFY] [RECALC] [GRAPH ] [NC CNV] [ STOP ]

[LINE] : Select a LINE


[ARC ]: Select a CW arc
[ARC ] : Select a CCW arc
[CORNER] : Select a corner-R
[CHAMF.] : Select a chamfering

- 80 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 1.OPERATING METHOD

[MODIFY] : A data entering menu screen for each figure is displayed, and can be used for modifying a
data that was previously entered.
[RECALC] : Calculation for whole contour figures is done again, and must be done after modifying a
part of contour figures or entering new figure.
[GRAPH] : Figure drawing screen is displayed, and can be used for checking the entered figure.
Enlarging, scale-down and others are available.
[NC CNV] : Convert entered contour figures into NC motion program.
After finishing conversion, a contour programming will be finished and exit to former
screen.
[STOP] : Stop a contour programming and after replying the prompt of it, it can exit to former screen.
NC program will be never made.

NOTE
During a contour programming, only line / arc / chamfering / corner-R on an
XY-plane or XZ-plane can be entered.

(3) Modify contour figures


There are two ways of modifying contour figure data that has already been fixed and stored.

(a) Method 1
Use a contour figure data screen
On the contour program list screen, position the cursor to the
figure block that is to be modified, and then press [MODIFY]. The figure data screen corresponding to
the selected figure is displayed, allowing you to enter new data. Enter the required new data and then
press [OK]. Then, press [RECALC] to calculate all of the contour figures by using the newly entered data.

(b) Method 2
Modify the data directly on a contour program list screen
On the contour program list screen, position the cursor to the data that is to be modified, enter a new
value, and then press key.
Then, press [RECALC] to calculate all of the contour figures by using the newly entered data.

NOTE
To clear a data entry, press key and then key.

(4) Insert a new contour figure


Position the cursor to the figure block immediately before the position where a new figure should be
inserted. Then, using the procedure described in examples 2 and 3, enter new figure block.
Then, press [RECALC] to calculate all of the contour figures using the newly entered data.

(5) Delete a contour figure


Position the cursor to the head of the figure block or figure symbol to be deleted, and then press
key. The prompt "ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE BLOCK?" will appear. Press [YES] to delete the
figure. Press [NO] to abandon the deletion.
Then, press [RECALC] to calculate all of the contour figures using the newly entered data.

(6) Change a contour figure


To change the figure type of a previously input contour figure, first delete the old figure block, and then
insert a new figure block.

- 81 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

1.OPERATING METHOD CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

1.4 CHECKING CONTOUR PROGRAMS


Entered contour figures can be checked on the screen by means of operations such as zooming-in,
zooming-out, and so on.
On the program list screen, press [GRAPH]. The graphic drawing screen shown below will appear. A
drawing scale appears at the bottom of the screen.

[LARGE ] [SMALL ] [ AUTO ] [ REAL ] [RETURN]

Pressing the right-end soft-key causes the next soft-key page to appear.

[ ← ] [ → ] [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] [CENTER]

[LARGE] : Double a scale factor.


[SMALL] : Make a scale factor half.
[AUTO] : Decide a scale factor automatically in order to draw a whole part within a screen.
[REAL] : Draw contour figures in real scale.
[RETURN] : Return to a contour program list screen.
[←] [→] [↑] [↓] : Move a view point to each direction. Cursor key can be used also to move.
[CENTER] : Move a drawing figure at the center of a screen.

1.5 CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM


Entered contour figures can be converted to NC programs in the form of G-code.
Press [NC CNV]. The following screen appears.
CONFIRM CONVERSION OF NC PROGRAM

YOU CAN SELECT NC CONVERSION TYPE

PUSH [YES] WITH NO DATA INPUT


→ NC PROGRAM WILL BE ENTERED TO ACTUAL PROGRAM

ENTER SUB PROGRAM NUMBER, THEN PUSH [YES]


→ NC PROGRAM WILL BE ENTERED AS A SUB PROGRAM

[ YES ] [ NO ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

By following the message displayed on the screen, press [YES] immediately or press it after entering a
sub program number.
If you press [YES] without entering a sub program number, the contour figures will be entered
immediately after the cursor before the start of Contour programming.
If you press [YES] after entering a new sub program number, the contour figure will be entered into the
newly made sub program, and a sub-program calling block such as M98 Pxxxx will be entered
immediately after the cursor before the start of Contour programming.
By pressing [NO], you can abandon the conversion operation.
Contour figures can be converted to the following G-code programs.
- 82 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 1.OPERATING METHOD

Type of Figure Symbol G-code


Start point n G00 or G01
Line → G01
Arc (CW) G02
Arc (CCW) G03
Corner R R G02 or G03
Chamfering C G01
Cutter compensation G41 or G42
Cutter compensation cancel G40

NOTE
1 Converted NC program blocks are stored immediately after the block to which
the cursor was positioned.
After a return to these previous screens, the cursor will be positioned to the head
of the NC program that was newly stored after conversion.
2 If there are any figures for which the end points are pending, NC program
conversion will be done for the contour figure immediately before the pending
block.
3 A value of up to eight digits can be entered for the axis command (X/Y (Z)) of a
converted NC program, and the value must always have a decimal point. The
decimal digits conform to the minimum setting units, with any lower digits being
rounded off.

(1) IS-B form


Least input increment Least command increment Max.
mm 0.001 mm 0.001 mm ±99999.999 mm
inch 0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch ±9999.9999 inch

NOTE
1 By setting bit 0 (IJR) of parameter No.9341 to 1, address "R" is output as the
radius data of arc n. By setting it to 0, data "I" and "J" are output as center point
coordinates.
2 Even if data having the same value is output continuously for a given address,
they will never be canceled.

- 83 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

2.CONTOUR FIGURE DATA CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

2 CONTOUR FIGURE DATA


This chapter details contour figure data to be entered on the contour figure data screen.
The contour figure data of a start point and straight line is described in detail in the previous chapter.
See the previous chapter if necessary.

Chapter 2, "CONTOUR FIGURE DATA", consists of the following sections:

2.1 START POINT........................................................................................................................................................................85


2.2 LINE ........................................................................................................................................................................................85
2.3 ARC.........................................................................................................................................................................................85
2.4 CORNER R .............................................................................................................................................................................85
2.5 CHAMFERING.......................................................................................................................................................................85
2.6 SELECT CROSSING POINT OF FIGURE ............................................................................................................................86

2.1 START POINT

Data item Comment


START POINT X X coordinate of a contour figure start point
START POINT Y / Z Y/Z coordinate of a contour figure start point
FEED METHOD Type of motion toward a start point
(No G-code/G00/G01)

The following soft keys are displayed.


[AUX.] : Call auxiliary calculating screen. The result of it will be set into start point coordinate data.
[OK] : Fix start point data and store into memory.
[EXIT] : Cancel start point entering and exit from contour programming.

NOTE
By setting a parameter No.9342#2(STP) to 1, data comment of start point can be
changed to "APPROACH POINT".

2.2 LINE
If you select a line, the line screen is displayed, allowing you to enter all the
figure data written on a drawing.
Even though the end point coordinate value does not appear in a drawing, it can be determined by
calculating the cross point coordinate between this figure and that to be entered next.
Data item Comment
START POINT X X coordinate of a contour figure start point
START POINT Y / Z Y/Z coordinate of a contour figure start point
ANGLE A Angle of line from +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.
TOUCH STATE Select from the following soft-key menu whether tangential or not between
neighbor figure.
[NO] : Not tangential
[LAST] :Tangential with the preceding figure

The following soft keys are displayed.

- 84 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 2.CONTOUR FIGURE DATA

[AUX.] : Call auxiliary calculating screen. The result of it will be set into end point coordinate or
angle data.
[OK] : Fix line figure data and store into memory.
[CANCEL] : Cancel line figure data entering and return to the contour program list screen.

2.3 ARC
Data item Comment
END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point
END POINT Y/Z Y/Z coordinate of an arc end point
RADIUS R Radius of an arc, but plus value only
CENTER I X coordinate of an arc center
CENTER J/K Y/Z coordinate of an arc center
TOUCH STATE Select from the following soft-key menu whether tangential or not between
neighbor figure.
[NO] : Not tangential
[LAST] :Tangential with the preceding figure
FEEDRATE Feedrate under G01 selecting

NOTE
1 The feedrate data item is displayed when parameter No.9341#3(FCD) is set to 1.
2 When entering the coordinates of an arc end point, do not round off the calculated
value.

The following soft keys are displayed.


[AUX.] : Call auxiliary calculating screen. The result of it will be set into start point coordinate data.
[OK] : Fix arc figure data and store into memory.
[CANCEL]: Cancel arc figure data entering and return to the contour program list screen.

2.4 CORNER R
Data item Comment
RADIUS R Radius of a corner R, but plus value only
FEEDRATE Feedrate

NOTE
The feedrate data item is displayed when parameter No.9341#3(FCD) is set to 1.

The following soft keys are displayed.


[OK] : Fix corner R figure data and store into memory.
[CANCEL] : Cancel corner R figure data entering and return to the contour program list screen.

2.5 CHAMFERING
Data item Comment
CAMFER C Chamfering amount, but plus value only
FEEDRATE Feedrate

NOTE
The feedrate data item is displayed when parameter No.9341#3(FCD) is set to 1.

- 85 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

2.CONTOUR FIGURE DATA CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

The following soft keys are displayed.


[OK] : Fix chamfering figure data and store into memory.
[CANCEL] : Cancel chamfering figure data entering and return to the contour program list screen.

2.6 SELECT CROSSING POINT OF FIGURE


During the calculation of a contour figure, such as between a line and an arc for example, there may be
cases in which two or more cross points or figures are possible. In this case, the screen for selecting a
cross point or figure appears.

The following soft keys are displayed.


[PREV.]/[NEXT] : Cross point or figure should be selected is changed. The active one blinks among
some figures should be selected.
[OK] : Select an active figure, blinking, finally.
[CANCEL] : Cancel a selecting operation. And then, store the actual figure into memory still
keeping it in pending.

- 86 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 3.CONTOUR CALCULATION

3 CONTOUR CALCULATION
This chapter explains the details of contour calculations, such as those for cross points or tangential points,
that are supported by contour programming.
A figure or part of a contour for which an end point has not yet been determined is said to be in the
pending state. A pending figure is indicated by a dotted line.
On the screen for entering contour figure data, more data input items than required will appear. These
data items are used to calculate the cross points with the immediately preceding pending figure block, and
also to calculate the end point.
Ten successive figure blocks can be specified as pending blocks.

NOTE
It is impossible to enter successive straight lines with only their angles specified.
(They are not assumed to be pending blocks.)

Chapter 3, "CONTOUR CALCULATION", consists of the following sections:

3.1 LINE......................................................................................................................................................87
3.2 ARC ......................................................................................................................................................89
3.3 LINE TANGENTIAL TO TWO ARCS ...............................................................................................91
3.4 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO BOTH CROSSING LINES AND ARCS.............................................92
3.5 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING LINE AND ARC .......................................................93
3.6 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING 2 ARCS......................................................................93

3.1 LINE
(1) When the preceding figure is not pending
(a) Only X is inputted
→ This line is determined as a vertical line.
(b) Only Y (Z) is inputted
→ This line is determined as a horizontal line.
(c) A and either X or Y (Z) are inputted
→ The end point that is not inputted is calculated.

X , Y (Z)
(2) When the preceding figure specifying an arc is not pending, and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in
the line.
(a) Either X or Y (Z) is inputted
→ The angle A is calculated automatically, and an end point is determined.
If neither X nor Y (Z) is inputted, this line will be pending.

A(Automatically calculated)

X, Y (Z)

- 87 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

3.CONTOUR CALCULATION CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

(3) When the preceding figure is pending, and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in the line.
(a) Both X and Y (Z), and A are inputted
→ The cross point between the preceding figure is calculated.

Cross point

X, Y (Z)

When the preceding figure is an arc, the cross point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary
one.

(4) When the preceding figure is pending arc, and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in the line.
It is assumed that the radius and the center point coordinate (I,K) of arc have already inputted.
(a) Only A is inputted
→ The tangential point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one.
This line will be pending.
Tangential point

A Tangential point

(b) Both X and Y (Z) are inputted


→ The tangential point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one.
This line will be determined.

Tangential
point

Tangential
point

(c) A and either X or Y (Z) are inputted


→ The tangential point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one.
This line will be determined.
Tangential point

Tangential
A point
X, Y (Z)

- 88 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 3.CONTOUR CALCULATION

If the positional relationship between the tangential point and the line is such that an
inputted A conflicts with the inputted X or Y (Z), a warning message is displayed to
indicate that invalid data has been inputted.

3.2 ARC
(1) When the preceding figure is not pending, and "TOUCH LAST" is not specified in the arc.
(a) I and J (K) are inputted.
→ This arc will be pending.
(b) X, Y (Z), and R are inputted.
→ A short path arc is uniquely defined.
(c) X, Z, I, and J (K) are inputted.
→ A short path arc is uniquely defined.

NOTE
If the distance (radius) between the start point and center differs from the end
point and center, the figure is displayed based on the actual form, and the actual
figure will not be machined correctly.

(d) Only R is inputted


→ By specifying "TOUCH LAST" and inputting a line with A=0 degree and Y coordinate as
an immediately after figure, this arc can be determined.

Tangential point

(2) When the preceding figure is not pending, and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in the arc.
(a) X and Y (Z) are inputted.
→ The radius is automatically calculated and this arc will be determined.
Tangential point

End point X, Y (Z)


(3) When the preceding figure is pending (foe which the start point has been determined), and "TOUCH
LAST" is not specified in this arc
(a) R, I, and J (K) are inputted.
→ The cross point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one. This arc will be
pending.
Cross point

Cross point R

Center I, J (K)

- 89 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

3.CONTOUR CALCULATION CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

(b) X, Y (Z), I, and K are inputted.


→ The cross point selection screen is displayed, so select a necessary one. This arc will be
determined.
Cross point

Cross point

End point Center I, J (K)


X, Y (Z)

(4) When the preceding figure is pending (for which the start point has been determined), and "TOUCH
LAST" is specified in the arc
(a) R, I, and J (K) are inputted.
→ The tangential point is calculated, and this arc will be pending.

Tangential point

Center I, J (K)

(b) X, Y (Z), I , and K are inputted.


→ The tangential point is calculated, and this arc will be determined.

Tangential point

End point
Center I, J (K)
X, Y (Z)

NOTE
If the distance (radius) between the start point and center differs from the end
point and center, the figure is displayed based on the actual form, and the actual
figure will not be machined correctly.

(c) R, X, and Y (Z) are inputted.


→ The tangential point is calculated and a short path arc is uniquely defined.
Tangential Tangential
point point

Long path Short path arc


arc R
R
End point X,Y (Z)

- 90 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 3.CONTOUR CALCULATION

(5) When the preceding figure "arc" is pending (for which the start point has been determined and only
R is to be inputted), and "TOUCH LAST" is specified in the arc.
(a) R, X, and Y (Z) are inputted.
→ The tangential point is calculated and a short path arc is uniquely defined.

R1
Tangential
Long path arc point
Tangential
point
Short path arc
R2
End point X, Y (Z)

(b) R, X, and Y (Z) are inputted.


→ The tangential point is calculated and a short path arc is uniquely defined.

R1

Tangential End point


point
Center Short path arc
I, J (K)
R2 Tangential
point R1

Long path arc

3.3 LINE TANGENTIAL TO TWO ARCS

(2)

(2)
Center of (3)
I3, J3 (K3) Center of (1)
I1, J1 (K1)
(2) Start point
R3
of (1)
(2)

By inputting three successive figures as follows, line (2) that is tangential to two arcs can be specified as
shown in the above drawing. The end points of (1) and (2) are determined, while (3) is left pending.
Among the above four possible lines, depending on the direction of the two arcs, the line that makes the
smoothest connection to the arcs is automatically selected.
- 91 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

3.CONTOUR CALCULATION CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

Arc (1) :
I and J (K) are inputted. (A start point is determined. This arc is pending.)
Line (2) :
Only "TOUCH LAST" is inputted.
Arc (3) :
R, I and J (K) are inputted.

3.4 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO BOTH CROSSING LINES AND


ARCS

(1)
(1)
(2) Tangential point
(2) Tangential point
R
Tangential point R

(3) (1)
(3)

(2) Tangential point


(3)

R
Tangential point

By inputting three successive figures as follows, arc (2) that is tangential to two lines or arcs can be
specified as shown in the above drawing. The end points of (1) and (2) are determined, while (3) is left
pending. When (3) is a line, it is determined.

Line (1) or Arc (1) :


Line that is pending (for which A is inputted and the start point has been determined), or Arc that is
pending (for which I and J (K) are inputted and the start point has been determined)
Arc (2) :
R and "TOUCH LAST" are inputted.
Line (3) or Arc (3) :
Line with A, X and, or Arc with R, I, J (K) and "TOUCH LAST"

When either figure (1) or (3) is an arc, or when both of them are arcs, the selection screen for multiple
arcs is displayed, so select a suitable one.

- 92 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 3.CONTOUR CALCULATION

3.5 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING LINE AND ARC

(3)
(1)

Tangential
Tangential
point R
point

(2)

By inputting three successive figures as follows, arc (2) that is tangential to line (1) and arc (3) that do not
cross, can be specified as shown in the above drawing. The end points of (1) and (2) are determined,
while (3) is left pending.
Among the multiple possible arcs shown above, the arc that makes the smoothest connection to line (1)
and arc (3) is automatically selected. But, even though a "Long path arc" and "Short path arc" remain,
select whichever is necessary from the selection screen.

Line (1) : Line that is pending (for which A is inputted and the start point has been determined)
Arc (2) : R and "TOUCH LAST" are inputted.
Arc (3) : Arc with R, I and J (K)

3.6 ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING 2 ARCS

Start
(3) point
(1)

R3 Center
Tangential I1, J1 (K1)
point R
Center Tangential
I3, J3 (K3) (2) point

By inputting three successive figures as follows, arc (2) that is tangential to arcs (1) and (3) that do not
cross can be specified as shown in the above drawing.
The end points of (1) and (2) are determined, while (3) is left pending.
Among the multiple possible arcs shown above, the arc that makes the smoothest connection to arcs (1)
and (3) is automatically selected. But, even though a "Long path arc" and "Short path arc" remain, select
whichever is necessary from the selection screen.

Arc (1) : Arc with I and J (K), and it is pending (for which the start point has been determined)
Arc (2) : R and "TOUCH LAST" are inputted.
Arc (3) : Arc with R, I, and J (K)

- 93 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.AUXILIARY CALCULATION CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

4 AUXILIARY CALCULATION
This chapter explains the details of the auxiliary calculation.
By using this auxiliary calculation, the coordinates of a point or the angle of a line can be determined.
Furthermore, the form of a contour, such as the amount of shift from the original form for a tool radius
can be entered easily.

(1) Data items in which auxiliary calculation can be used


(a) Start point
- Coordinate (X, Y (Z)) of start point
(b) Line
- Coordinate (X, Y (Z)) of end point
- Angle of a line (A)
(c) Arc
- Coordinate (X, Y (Z)) of end point
- Coordinate (I, J(K)) of center
- Specifying an arc

(2) Calculation type available in auxiliary calculation


(a) Calculation of coordinate
- A point specified by polar coordinate
- A point specified by a point, angle and distance
- A point specified by rotating a point
- Neighbor point of a line
- Cross point between 2 lines
- Cross point between line and arc
- Cross point between 2 arcs
(b) Calculation of angle
- Angle of the line passes 2 points
- Angle of a line rectangular to the line passes 2 points
(c) Specify an arc (Center and radius)
- An arc passes 1 point and its center coordinate has been determined
- An arc passes 2 points and its radius has been determined
- An arc passes 3 points

- 94 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 4.AUXILIARY CALCULATION

4.1 START POINT


(1) Selecting type of calculation
On the data-entry screen for a start point, press [AUX.]. The following calculation type menu screen will
appear.
By pressing the cursor key, scroll through the menu comments until you find the one to select.

SELECT CALCULATION OF START POINT

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7.

1. POINT BY POLAR COORD.

[ ][ ][ ][ OK ][CANCEL ]

The following soft keys are displayed.


[OK] : Use the active calculation type
[CANCEL] : Cancel selecting operations and return to the previous screen

NOTE
When bit 5 (AUX) of parameter No.9305 is set to 1, the menu for auxiliary
calculation is displayed as shown above. By setting it to 0, the menu is displayed
as a list of comments for each calculation type.
This parameter is available for other auxiliary calculation menus.

(2) Entering data for calculation


(a) A point specified by polar coordinate
Data item Comment
DIST. D Distance between the point and work coordinate origin
ANGLE A Angle of line from +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.

(b) A point specified by a point, angle and distance


Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the base point
POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the base point
DIST. D Distance between the point and the base point
ANGLE A Angle of line from +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.

(c) A point specified by rotating a point


Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the base point
POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the base point
- 95 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.AUXILIARY CALCULATION CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

Data item Comment


CENTER I X coordinate of the rotating center
CENTER J / K Y or Z coordinate of the rotating center
ANGLE A Angle of line from +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.

(d) Neighbor point of a line


You can determine the nearest point to the line. Furthermore, you can determine the nearest point to the
line that has been moved through a specific distance.
This can be useful for determining the end point of an approaching motion from a certain point close to
the line.

(1) When specifying a line with one point and an angle


Data item Comment
BASE POINT X X coordinate of the base point positioned apart from a line
BASE POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the base point positioned apart from a line
PASS POINT U X coordinate of a certain point on the line
PASS POINT V / W Y or Z coordinate of a certain point on the line
ANGLE A Angle of line from +X or +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

(2) When specifying a line with two points


By pressing soft key [XY,XY] or [XZ,XZ], you can specify a line with two passing points.
By pressing soft key [XY, A] or [XZ, A], you can select the above type by using an angle again.
Data item Comment
BASE POINT X X coordinate of the base point positioned apart from a line
BASE POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the base point positioned apart from a line
PASS POINT U X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT V / W Y or Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT P X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
PASS POINT Q Y or Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting distance
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

(e) Cross point between 2 lines


The cross point of two lines can be calculated. Furthermore, this calculation can also be done for a line
that is shifted from its original position by some distance.
This can be useful when entering a tool path that is shifted from the original figure by an amount equal to
the tool radius.

(1) When specifying a line with one point and an angle


Initially, the following data items are displayed for Line-1.
Data item Comment
PASS POINT X X coordinate of a certain point on the line
BASE POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of a certain point on the line
ANGLE A Angle of line from +X or +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting distance
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

By pressing [NEXT] after entering the necessary data, a similar data item screen for Line-2 is
displayed. By pressing [PREV.], you can return to the previous screen for Line-1.

(2) When specifying a line with two points


By pressing soft key [XY,XY] or [XZ,XZ], you can specify a line with two passing points.
By pressing soft key [XY, A] or [XZ, A], you can select the above type by using an angle again.
- 96 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 4.AUXILIARY CALCULATION

The following data items are displayed respectively for Line-1 and Line-2.
Data item Comment
PASS POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
PASS POINT V / W Y or Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

(f) Cross point between line and arc


The cross point between a line and arc can be calculated. For the line, one that has been shifted through
some distance can be used for the calculation.
This is useful for entering a tool path that has been shifted from the original figure by an amount equal to
the tool radius.

(1) When specifying a line with one point and an angle


Initially, the following data items are displayed for the Line.
Data item Comment
PASS POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
ANGLE A Angle of line from +X or +Z-axis. A positive angle is counter clockwise direction.
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

By pressing [NEXT] after entering the necessary data, the following screen for the Arc is displayed.
By pressing [PREV.], you can return to the previous screen for the Line.
By pressing [NEXT] after entering the necessary data, a similar data item screen for Line-2 is
displayed. By pressing [PREV.], you can return to the previous screen for Line-1.
Data item Comment
CENTER I X coordinate of an arc center
CENTER J / K Y or Z coordinate of an arc center
RADIUS R Radius of an arc, but plus value only
SELECT Select necessary cross point from two possible points by arrow soft-keys

(2) When specifying a line with two points


By pressing [XZ,XZ], you can specify a line with two passing points.
By pressing [XZ, A], you can select the above type using an angle again.
Data item Comment
PASS POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
PASS POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
PASS POINT V / W Y or Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line
SHIFT DIST. D When the line should be specified by shifting an original line, enter the shifting distance
SHIFT DIRC. Select a shifting direction by arrow soft-keys

Data screen for the arc is displayed quite similar to the case of (1).

(g) Cross point between 2 arcs


On the screen as shown below, data for two arcs can be entered and the cross point between them can be
calculated.
Data item Comment
CENTER X1 X coordinate of an arc-1 center
CENTER Y1 / Z1 Y or Z coordinate of an arc-1 center
RADIUS R1 Radius of an arc-1, but plus value only
CENTER X2 X coordinate of an arc-2 center
- 97 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.AUXILIARY CALCULATION CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

Data item Comment


CENTER Y2 / Z2 Y or Z coordinate of an arc-2 center
RADIUS R2 Radius of an arc-2, but plus value only
SELECT Select necessary cross point from two possible points by arrow soft-keys

(3) Execution of auxiliary calculation


After entering all of the necessary data for each of the above calculation types, press [OK]. The
auxiliary calculation is done, and then the result is entered into the coordinate data item (X, Z) of the start
point.
By pressing [CANCEL], you can return to the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

4.2 LINE
As part of the auxiliary calculation for a line, the end point coordinate and angle can be calculated.
The following soft-keys are displayed on the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

[ENDPNT] : Menu screen for end point calculation is displayed


[ANGLE] : Menu screen for angle calculation is displayed

For the end point calculation, these items are similar to those for the start point, so refer to the preceding
explanation.

(1) Selecting type of calculation


On the menu screen for the auxiliary calculation of a line, press [ANGLE]. The following menu screen
for angle calculation appears.
By pressing the cursor key, you can scroll through the menu comments until you find the type that you
want to select.

SELECT CALCULATION OF ANGLE (LINE)

1. 2.

1. ANGLE OF LINE

[ ENDPT ][ ANGLE ][ ][ OK ][CANCEL ]

(2) Entering data for calculation


(a) Angle of the line passes 2 points
Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line, this should be apart from the
1st point
POINT V / W Y or Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line, this should be apart from
the 1st point

- 98 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 4.AUXILIARY CALCULATION

(b) Angle of a line rectangular to the line passes 2 points


The angle of a line that is rectangular to a line and which passes through two points can be calculated.
Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the line
POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line, this should be apart from the
1st point
POINT V / W Y or Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the line, this should be apart from
the 1st point

(3) Execution of auxiliary calculation


After entering all of the necessary data for each of the above calculation types, press [OK]. The auxiliary
calculation is performed, after which the result is entered into the end point coordinate (X, Z) or angle (A)
of the line.
By pressing [CANCEL], you can return to the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

4.3 ARC
As part of the auxiliary calculation for an arc, the end point coordinate and center coordinate can be
calculated. Furthermore, the arc itself can be specified by entering the likes of three passing points.
The following soft-keys are displayed on the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

[ENDPNT] : Menu screen for end point calculation is displayed


[CENTER] : Menu screen for center point calculation is displayed
[CIRCLE] : Menu screen for circle specifying is displayed

For the end point and center point calculation, they are quite similar to those for the start point case, so
refer to the preceding explanation.

(1) Selecting type of calculation


On the menu screen for auxiliary calculation of an arc, press [CIRCLE]. The following menu screen for
specifying a circle is displayed.
By pressing the cursor keys, you can scroll through the menu items until you find the item that you want
to select. The currently selected item is highlighted in yellow.

SELECT CALCULATION OF CIRCLE (ARC )

1. 2. 3.

1. CIRCLE BY CENT. & POINT

[ ENDPNT ][ CENTER ][ CIRCLE ][ OK ][CANCEL ]

- 99 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.AUXILIARY CALCULATION CONTOUR PROGRAMMING B-64434EN/02

(2) Entering data for calculation


(a) An arc passes 1 point and its center coordinate has been determined
Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of a certain point on the arc
POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of a certain point on the arc
CENTER I X coordinate of an arc center
CENTER J / K Y or Z coordinate of an arc center

(b) An arc passes 2 points and its radius has been determined
Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the arc
POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the arc
POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points
POINT V /W Y or Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from
other points
RADIUS R Radius of the arc, but plus value only
SELECT Select necessary one from two possible arcs by arrow soft-keys

(c) An arc passes 3 points


Data item Comment
POINT X X coordinate of the 1st passing point on the arc
POINT Y / Z Y or Z coordinate of the 1st passing point on the arc
POINT U X coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points
POINT V / W Y or Z coordinate of the 2nd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from
other points
POINT P X coordinate of the 3rd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from other
points
POINT Q Y or Z coordinate of the 3rd passing point on the arc, this should be apart from
other points

(3) Execution of auxiliary calculation


After entering all the necessary data for each of the above calculation types, press [OK]. The auxiliary
calculation is performed, after which the result is entered into the end point coordinate (X, Z) or center
point coordinate (I, K) of an arc.
When circle specification is selected by [CIRCLE], the radius and center point coordinate are calculated
and the results are entered into these data items.

By pressing [CANCEL], you can return to the auxiliary calculation menu screen.

4.4 OTHERS

4.4.1 Calculation of Inputting Data


When entering data for the items on the contour programming screen, calculation as shown below can be
made as in a desktop calculator.

Addition :
10+10 → 20

- 100 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING 4.AUXILIARY CALCULATION

Subtraction :
10-10 → 0

Multiplication :
10*10 → 100

Division :
10/10 → 1

SIN :
S30 → 0.5

COS :
C60 → 0.5

TAN :
T45 → 1

Square root :
R9 → 3

NOTE
1 For + - * /, more than two terms cannot be handled at once. The third and
subsequent terms are neglected. So, 1 + 2 + 3 will be calculated as 1 +2.
2 The calculation of SIN, COS, TAN and Square root can be done as only
independent calculations. The second and subsequent terms, if specified, will be
neglected. C60 + S60 will be calculated as C60 only.
Calculation based on previously input data is also possible.

4.4.2 Notes
NOTE
1 No more than forty figures can be entered for a contour program.
2 During contour program operation, if the screen is changed to another ones by
the user pressing the likes of a function button, the active screen displayed in
contour programming will be forced to close.
3 When editing a contour program, keep the following in mind.
(1) A contour program that was operated one or more times cannot be edited.
(2) After creating a contour program, another contour figure cannot be newly
entered.

- 101 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

APPENDIX
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX A.ALARMS

A ALARMS
If one or more of the set of the parameters or inputted programs are not correct when an attempt is made
to execute that program, the following P/S alarms are raised.
When an alarm other than the following P/S alarms is raised, refer to the relevant NC operator’s manual.

Appendix A, "ALARMS", consists of the following sections:

A.1 MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM ALARMS.................................................................................105


A.2 LATHE SYSTEM ALARMS ...........................................................................................................106

A.1 MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM ALARMS


Alarm No. Description
Cause Necessary data is not entered. Or entered data is invalid.
Action Display the block data of pop-up window, at which is occurred the alarm, and enter
3001 the correct data after confirming it.
Reference All cycle machining other than hole machining in “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE"
of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0 or less.
Action Confirm the D code, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the
3002 offset table.
Reference All cycle machining other than hole machining in “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE"
of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause Machining is impossible because the cutter diameter is too large.
Action Confirm the tool or block data, at which is occurred the alarm and select the tool of
3004
smaller radius than the last time.
Reference Pocketing in “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE" of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause The tool interferes with the opposite edge because the length of approach is too
long.
3005 Action Confirm the approach data, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data
to the approach.
Reference Pocketing in “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE" of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause Corner R interferes with the opposite one because the radius of corner R is too
large.
3006 Action Confirm the radius of corner R, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct
data to the radius.
Reference Pocketing for corner R in “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE" of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause Corner R machining can not be performed because the cutter diameter is larger than
corner R.
3008 Action Confirm the tool or block data, at which is occurred the alarm and select the tool of
smaller radius than the last time.
Reference Pocketing for corner R in “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE" of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause The chamfering tool interferes with the bottom surface (Z point) in chamfering.
Action Confirm the block data or block data related to chamfer tool, at which is occurred the
3012
alarm and enter the correct data to it.
Reference Pocketing of “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE" of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause The angle at which the chamfering tool is placed is not specified.
Action Confirm the block data related to chamfer tool, at which is occurred the alarm and
3013
enter the correct data to it.
Reference Pocketing in “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE" of III MILLING CYCLE

- 105 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

A.ALARMS APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

Alarm No. Description


Cause Tool diameter is 0 or it is not specified.
3022 Action Input correct data.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause Machinining block and figure block are not specified.
3025 Action In Machining cycle, machining block and the figure block has to be specified.
Reference “2.1 NEWLY CREATING A MACHINING CYCLE” of III MILLING CYCLE
Cause Machining type is not correct in G1055.
3026 Action Specify the machining type except 2 and 4.
Reference 3.4 GROOVE MACHINING. Of III MILLING CYCLE

A.2 LATHE SYSTEM ALARMS


Alarm No. Description
The value of canned cycle data is incorrect. For example, a negative value is
Cause
entered for an item that must be positive.
3001 Display the input data screen of the block in which this alarm occurred and input
Action
correct data if the value of the entered data is incorrect.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE
The figure block of the cycle machining specified in the machining type block cannot
Cause
be found.
3002
Action Enter the figure data of the cycle machining specified in the machining type block.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE
Cause The feedrate or feed amount is not specified.
Display the input data screen of the block in which this alarm occurred and input
3005 Action
correct data if the value of the entered data is incorrect.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE
Cause Check the cutting amount.
Display the input data screen of the block in which this alarm occurred and input
3006 Action
correct data if the value of the entered data is incorrect.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE
Because the finishing allowance is too large or tool nose R radius is too large, the
Cause
rough cutting cannot be executeed in turning or trapezoidal grooving.
3015
Action Reduce finishing allowance or change tool with smaller nose R radius.
Reference IV Turnning cycle
Tool nose R radius is too large, the finnishing cannot be executed in turning or
Cause
trapezoidal grooving.
3016
Action Change tool with smaller nose R radius.
Reference IV Turnning cycle
Cutting in bar machining is impossible because of the relationship between the tool
angle, cutting edge angle, and clearance angle (parameter No. 9371) for the tool
Cause used.
3020 This alarm is raised when the sum of the above three angles is less than or equal to
90 degrees or is greater than or equal to 180 degrees.
Action Check these three angles value, and if necessary change the tool.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE
Cause Machining figure is not correct in turning.
3022 Action Input correct figure.
Reference IV Turnning cycle
A correct tool path cannot be calculated in bar machining. This alarm is raised when
Cause there is a error in the result of internal calculation (for example, when the value
under a square root sign is negative because of an error in calculation)
3025
Check the figure data of the Bar machining and specify smaller finish amount or use
Action
a tool with smaller nose radius.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE

- 106 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX A.ALARMS


Alarm No. Description
The groove width or tool used is incorrect in grooving. This alarm is raised when the
Cause
width of the tool is used is larger than the groove width excluding finishing amount.
3026
Action Check the groove width finishing amount and tool width.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE
Cutting trapezoidal grooving is impossible because of the relationship of the groove
Cause bottom width and the tool width. This alarm is raised when the cutting edge width of
3028 the tool used is larger than the groove bottom width excluding finishing amount.
Action Check the groove width finishing amount and tool width.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE
Cause The start point for threading coincides with the end point.
3029 Action Check the figure data for the threading to this alarm, and enter correct figure data.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE
Cause The number of figure blocks exceeded the maximum block number.
Change the setting so that the number of figure blocks does not exceed the
3035 Action
maximum block number.
Reference V CONTOUR PROGRAMMING
The groove finishing machining block (G1133/G1135) was combined with the normal
Cause
groove figure (G1460) during command execution.
3036 To perform only roughing or finishing with the finishing allowance left in a normal
Action
groove, set bit 4 of parameter No. 9302 to 0.
Reference “3. INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE” in IV TURNING CYCLE

- 107 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

B PARAMETERS
WARNING
Be sure to use the parameter settings made by the machine tool builder.
Otherwise, a machining cycle may not operate correctly.
If a machining cycle does not operate correctly, the tool may interfere with the
workpiece or perform forced machining, causing breakage of the tool or machine
or serious injury.

Appendix B, "PARAMETERS" consists of the following sections.

B.1 PARAMETERS COMMON TO MACHINING CENTER AND LATHE SYSTEM......................108


B.2 LATHE SYSTEM PARAMETERS..................................................................................................112

B.1 PARAMETERS COMMON TO THE MACHINING CENTER


AND LATHE SYSTEM
9048 EXEPNO

EXEPNO P-CODE macro number of the execution macro


When using MANUAL GUIDE 0i, be sure to set this parameter to 94 for the M series or
96 for the T series.
[Valid data range] 94 or 96
[Unit of data] 1

9049 CAPPNO

CAPPNO P-CODE macro number of the conversation macro


When using MANUAL GUIDE 0i, be sure to set this parameter to 94 for the M series or
96 for the T series.
[Valid data range] 94 or 96
[Unit of data] 1

9050 AUXPNO

AUXPNO P-CODE macro number of the auxiliary macro


When using MANUAL GUIDE 0i, be sure to set this parameter to 94 for the M series or
96 for the T series.
[Valid data range] 94 or 96
[Unit of data] 1

9071 EX2PNO

AUXPNO P-CODE macro number of the second execution macro


When using MANUAL GUIDE 0i, be sure to set this parameter to 93 for the M series or
95 for the T series.
[Valid data range] 93 or 95
[Unit of data] 1

- 108 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX B.PARAMETERS


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9300 PD2 PD1

PD1 = 0 : Does not change the process data screen (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM)
=1: Changes the process data screen (MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM)
PD2 = 0 : Does not change the process data screen (LATHE SYSTEM)
=1: Changes the process data screen (LATHE SYSTEM)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9301 COL CS3 CS2 CS1 CS0

COL= 0 : M7 is Flood and M8 is Mist on the process data input screen.


= 1 : M7 is Mist and M8 is Flood on the process data input screen.

CS1,CS0 = 0,1 : When CNC is powered on, CUSTOM screen(Conversational Macro screen1) of the 1st
path is displayed.
= 1,0 : When CNC is powered on, CUSTOM screen(Conversational Macro screen2) of the 1st
path is displayed.
= 1,1 : When CNC is powered on, CUSTOM screen(Conversational Macro screen3) of the 1st
path is displayed.
= 0,0 : When CNC is powered on, POSITION screen(Current Position screen) of the 1st path is
displayed.
CS3,CS2 = 0,1 : When CNC is powered on, CUSTOM screen(Conversational Macro screen1) of the 2nd
path is displayed.
= 1,0 : When CNC is powered on, CUSTOM screen(Conversational Macro screen2) of the 2nd
path is displayed.
= 1,1 : When CNC is powered on, CUSTOM screen(Conversational Macro screen3) of the 2nd
path is displayed.
= 0,0 : When CNC is powered on, POSITION screen(Current Position screen) of the 2nd path is
displayed.

NOTE
In case of setting the parameter No.9301#0<CS0>~#3<CS3>, set
also the parameter No.8650#1<CNA> to 1 (When CNC alaram
occurs during User screen by C-language executor is displayed,
Alarm screen is not displayed independent of the parameter
No.3111#7<NPA> setting).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9304 M99 CMP DCD G41 FCD RAD IJR

IJR = 0 : The arc command in the I/J format is output in NC program conversion.
=1: The arc command in the R format is output.
RAD = 0 : The unit of angle data becomes degree.
=1: The unit of angle data becomes radian.
FCD = 0 : Feedrate data cannot be entered.
=1: Feedrate data can be entered.
G41 = 0 : Cutter compensation data cannot be entered.
=1: Cutter compensation data can be entered.
DCD = 0 : A compensation number can be entered when G41 is 1.
=1: A compensation number cannot be entered when G41 is 1.
CMP = 0 : The start point screen is displayed first.
=1: The compensation data screen is displayed first.

- 109 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

M99 = 0 : A converted NC program is not followed by M99.


= 1 : A converted NC program is followed by M99.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9305 AUX STP KEY COL

COL = 0 : The standard color is used for guidance drawing.


=1: The color set by parameters No. 9400 to 9409 is used for guidance drawing.
KEY = 0 : The up, down, left, and right cursor keys are provided as MDI keys.
=1: Only the up and down cursor keys are provided as MDI keys.
• The up, down, left, and right cursor keys are displayed as soft keys on page 3 of the
contour program list screen.
• The cursor on the contour program list screen moves right with the down cursor key
or left with the up cursor key.
STP = 0 : [START POINT] is displayed in the start point data window.
=1: [APPROACH POINT] is displayed in the start point data window.
AUX = 0 : The auxiliary menu is displayed as a comment list.
=1: The auxiliary menu is displayed as a drawing.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9316 TG2 M99

M99 = 0 : An subprogram is not followed by M99 during output.


=1: An subprogram is followed by M99 during output.
TG2 = 0 : Does not display adjacent condition soft key [NEXT].
=1: Displays adjacent condition soft key [NEXT].

9358 TMPPNO

TMPPNO Program number used as a temporary program saving area for NC program conversion.
When this parameter is 0, a warning message appears and selection of the MANUAL
GUIDE 0i screen is disabled.

9400 CNTCL0

CNTCL0 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of the contour)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

9401 CNTCL1

CNTCL1 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of the end point)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

9402 CNTCL2

CNTCL2 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of the center point)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

- 110 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX B.PARAMETERS


9403 CNTCL3

CNTCL3 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of the drawing of calculation results)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

9404 CNTCL4

CNTCL4 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of the pass points)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

9405 CNTCL5

CNTCL5 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of the reference position/reference line)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

9406 CNTCL6

CNTCL6 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of dimension lines)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

9407 CNTCL7

CNTCL7 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of auxiliary lines)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

9408 CNTCL8

CNTCL8 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen
(color of shift lines)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

9409 CNTCL9

CNTCL9 Number indicating the color of the guide drawing of the contour programming screen (the
color of the other line of the intersection of two elements)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1

- 111 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

B.2 LATHE SYSTEM PARAMETERS


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9302 GRV

GRV = 0 : Does not distinguish roughing and finishing in normal grooving.


= 1 : Distinguishes roughing and finishing in normal grooving.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9303 BKT

BKT = 0 : Disables the back tool post (X negative area machining).


= 1 : Enables the back tool post (X negative area machining).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9306 ING EFV

ING = 0 : Disables inner surface grooving.


= 1 : Enables inner surface grooving.
EFV = 0 : Disables the feedrate override and cutting amount override of the end face in concurrent
end facing (roughing).
= 1 : Enables the feedrate override and cutting amount override of the end face in concurrent
end facing (roughing)
Related parameters: P9359, P9360

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9310 MTA NCR SGT SFC

SFC = 0 : Performs cutter radius compensation using only the tool tip radius for an arc created in
bar machining. The finishing allowance is used as a compensation shift amount.
= 1 : Both the tool tip radius and the finishing allowance are used in the above compensation.
SGT = 0 : Disables cutting edge compensation.
= 1 : Enables cutting edge compensation.
NCR = 0 : G41 and G42 are used in a bar machining finishing cycle.
= 1 : Neither G41 nor G42 is used.
MTA = 0 : Performs multiple types of threading by shifting the start point of each screw.
= 1 : Performs multiple types of threading by specifying angle (Q).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9312 RFN

RFN = 0 : Always performs semi-finishing.


= 1 : Does not perform semi-finishing.

NOTE
As shown below, semi-finishing is performed according to the start
point and end point of cutting of the entered figure regardless of the
setting of bit 5 (RFN) of this parameter.

- 112 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX B.PARAMETERS

Figure end point


Cutting start point
: Semi-finishing is performed
according to the setting of bit 5
(RFN) of this parameter.
Cutting start point
: Semi-finishing is performed
unconditionally.
Figure start point

9350 STGECF

STFECF Override value of cutting feed at the start of cutting in reaming


[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1%

9351 RIMKLN

RIMKLN Automatic determination value of the cutting lip length at the start of cutting in reaming
When no cutting lip length (Q) is specified in a reaming command (G1103) block, this
parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9353 S1TTMN

S1TTMN M-code output before normal tapping in turning


[Valid data range] 0 to 999
[Unit of data] 1%
When this parameter is set to 0, nothing is output.

9354 S1TTMR

S1TTMR M-code output before reverse tapping in turning


[Valid data range] 0 to 999
[Unit of data] 1%
When using reverse tapping in turning, set this parameter to an non-zero M code value.

9359 FFROVD

FFAOVD Feedrate override during concurrent (rough) end facing


When this parameter is set to 0, 100% is assumed.
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1%
[Related parameter] No. 9306#3

9360 FFAOVD

FFAOVD Cutting override during concurrent (rough) end facing


When this parameter is set to 0, 100% is assumed.
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
- 113 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

[Unit of data] 1%
[Related parameter] No. 9306#3

9361 MBF1EX

MBF1EX M code before execution of cycle cutting


When this parameter is set to 0, nothing is output.
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Unit of data] 1%

9362 CLRNEX

CLRNEK Clearance used for finishing of unnecked part


[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9363 ESCNEX

ESCNEK Escape amount used for finishing of unnecked part


[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9364 SFCLRX

SFCLRX Clearance (diameter value) in the X-axis direction in bar machining


Set this parameter to a value equal to or greater than the tool-nose radius compensation.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9365 SFCLRZ

SFCLRZ Clearance in the Z-axis direction in bar machining


Set this parameter to a value equal to or greater than the tool-nose radius compensation.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9366 ZEROPT

ZEROPT = 0: The program zero point is located on the workpiece end face.
= 1: The program zero point is located on the chuck end face.

+X

Figure end point CLSCRZ


CLSCRX


Figure start point

+Z

- 114 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX B.PARAMETERS


9369 RELFX

RELFX X component (diameter value) of escape amount from the cutting surface in in-feed
machining of outer/inner bar machining
When no escape amount (E) is specified in an outer/inner bar machining command
(G112x) block, this parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9370 RELFZ

RELFZ Z component (radius value) of escape amount from the cutting surface in in-feed
machining of outer/inner bar machining
When no escape amount (E) is specified in an outer/inner bar machining command
(G112x) block, this parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9371 TLBACK

TLBACK Angle between the tool back and the workpiece surface in intermediate cutting
[Valid data range] 0 to 180
[Unit of data] 1 degree

TLBACK

9372 PCOVR1

PCOVR1 Feed amount override when the tool cutting angle is greater than 90° and equal to or less
than 135°

9373 PCOVR2

PCOVR2 Feed amount override when the tool cutting angle is greater than 135° and less than 180°

9374 PCOVR3

PCOVR3 Feed amount override when the tool cutting angle is greater than 180° and equal to or less
than 225°

9375 PCOVR4

PCOVR4 Feed amount override when the tool cutting angle is greater than 225° and less than 270°
[Valid data range] 0 to 20
[Unit of data] 10%

- 115 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

NOTE
When the tool cutting angle is 90°, 180°, or 270°, override is invalid.
When any of parameters No. 9372 to 9375 is set to 0, override is
invalid.

<4>
<3>
<1> <1>
<2>
<2> <2>
<1>
<3> <3>
<4> <4>

Outer surface (forward direction) Outer surface (reverse direction) Inner surface (forward direction)

<3> <2>
<4>
<3>
<4> <1>
<2>
<1>

<4> <1>
<3> <2>
End face (reverse direction)
Inner surface (reverse direction) End face (forward direction)

<1>: 90° < Tool cutting angle ≦ 135°


<2>: 135° < Tool cutting angle < 180°
<3>: 180° < Tool cutting angle ≦ 225°
<4>: 225° < Tool cutting angle < 270°

9377 ENDECX

ENDECX X coordinate for reduction of a feed amount in concurrent (rough) end facing
This parameter is valid when ENDECX is greater than (figure start point X - tool nose
diameter) in outer surface rough machining.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9378 ENDCRT

ENDCRT Feed amount override near the center in concurrent (rough) end facing
This parameter is valid when the end face cutting allowance is specified.
When this parameter is set to 0, 100% is assumed.
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
[Unit of data] %

- 116 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX B.PARAMETERS

F1 = Feed amount of a
machining type block

9379 CUTANG

CUTANG Cutting edge angle


When no cutting edge angle (V) is specified in a bar machining command (G112x) block,
this parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 1800
[Unit of data] 0.1 degree

9380 TLNANG

TLNANG Tool angle


When no tool angle (A) is specified in a bar machining command (G112x) block, this
parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 1800
[Unit of data] 0.1 degree

9381 CLGRVX

CLGRVX Clearance (diameter value) in the X-axis direction in outer groove machining and inner
groove machining
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9382 CLGRVZ

CLGRVZ Clearance (radius value) in the Z-axis direction in end face grooving
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

GRVBCK

CLGRVZ

GRVBCK

OVRGRV CLGRVX
OVRGRV

- 117 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

9385 GRVBCK

GRVBCK Pecking return amount (radius value) of grooving


[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9386 OVLGRV

OVLGRV Amount of overlap between grooves in grooving (percentage relative to the tool width)
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
[Unit of data] %

9387 CLSCRX

CLSCRX Clearance in the X-axis direction in threading (diameter value)


When clearance X (C) is not specified in a threading command (G114x) block, this
parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9388 CLSCRZ

CLSCRZ Clearance in the Z-axis direction in threading


When clearance Z (M) is not specified in a threading command (G114x) block, this
parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

CLSCRZ

CLSCRX

9389 TRDMIN

TRDMIN Minimum cutting amount (radius value) in threading


[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9390 TRDFNX

TRDFNX Finishing allowance in the X-axis direction in threading (diameter value)


When finishing allowance X (H) is not specified in a threading command (G114x) block,
this parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

- 118 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX B.PARAMETERS


9393 DRLDEC

DRLDEC Cutting decrement amount (radius value) in drilling (peck drilling, high speed peck
drilling)
The cutting amount (Q) specified in a drilling command (G1101) block is decremented by
DRLDEC.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9394 DRLRET

DRLRET Retract amount (radius value) in drilling (peck drilling, high speed peck drilling)
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9395 DRLMIN

DRLMIN Minimum cutting amount (radius value) in drilling (peck drilling, high speed peck
drilling)
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9396 BRSHFT

BRSHFT Initial setting of a shift amount during a return in boring


When the shift amount during a return is not specified in a boring command (G1104)
block, this parameter is used.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
[Unit of data] 0.001mm/0.0001inch

9397 RMROV

RMROV Feed amount (feedrate) override during a return in reaming


F’=F*RMROV/100
In reaming, a return is made at this speed F'
When this parameter is set to 0, an override of 100% is assumed.
[Valid data range] 0 to 200
[Unit of data] 1%

- 119 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

C. LINKING MACRO CREATED BY


MACHINE TOOL BUILDER WITH
MANUAL GUIDE 0i MACRO APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

C LINKING MACRO CREATED BY MACHINE


TOOL BUILDER WITH MANUAL GUIDE 0i
MACRO
A macro program created by the machine tool builder can be created and integrated as a user module
(MEM file) that differs from a software module for MANUAL GUIDE 0i.
After creating a user module, the machine tool builder is to write the module to the FROM with the boot
system.

The method of creating a user module is described below.

C.1 CREATING A MACRO PROGRAM


The machine tool builder uses the divided module function of the macro executor to create a macro
program.
Specifically, create the macro program of the second or third module in the same way as in the 0i
-TD/MD.
Set the P-code macro numbers of a macro program created by the machine tool builder in the following
parameters.
(Up to two P-code macro numbers can be used.)

9055 MD2PNO

MD2PNO P-CODE macro number of the second module


[Valid data range] 1 to 4
[Unit of data] 1

9056 MD3PNO

MD2PNO P-CODE macro number of the third module


[Valid data range] 1 to 4
[Unit of data] 1

C.2 RESTRICTIONS ON MACRO PROGRAM NUMBERS


The machine tool builder can use only the following macro program numbers to create a macro program,.

(1) Macro program numbers allowed for the M series


O1300 to O1989
O2000 to O2999
O3300 to O4999
O5100 to O5389
O5400 to O5999
O6900 to O7199
O8700 to O8899
O9001 to O9009
O9011 to O9029
O9060 to O9119
O9641 to O9699
- 120 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

C.LINKING MACRO CREATED BY


MACHINE TOOL BUILDER WITH
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX MANUAL GUIDE 0i MACRO

O9920 to O9996

(2) Macro program numbers allowed for the T series


O9001 to O9009
O9011 to O9029
O9060 to O9569
O9920 to O9996

C.3 RESTRICTIONS ON MACRO VARIABLES


There are no restrictions on macro variables.

C.4 CUSTOM SOFTWARE CAPACITY


When creating a macro program, the machine tool builder needs to purchase the custom software capacity
option for the macro program.

- 121 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

D CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL GUIDE 0i


BY THE MACHINE TOOL BUILDER
This chapter is the auxiliary explanation on the customization of “M code support function”.

D.1 AUXILIARY EXPLANATION ON THE CUATOMIZATION OF


“M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION”
It is possible to customize the following in “M code support function”.
(1) Customizing M code help screen
(2) Customizing M code text screen

D.1.1 Customizing M Code Help Screen

On the M-code help screen, it’s possible to display user’s own M-code list.
M CODE HELP 1/ 3
M00 PROGRAM STOP
M01 OPTIONAL STOP M-code list
M02 PROGRAM END
M03 SPINDLE FORWARD
M04 SPINDLE REVERSE
M05 SPINDLE STOP
M06 TOOL CHANGE
M07 FLOOD COOLANT
M08 MIST COOLANT
NUM=
[ G CODE ] [ M CODE ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

(Example of Mcode Help screen )

D.1.2 Customizing M Code Text Screen


On the M code Help screen, entering number of M code to “NUM=” and depressing [INPUT] key, M
Code Text screen is displayed.
On the M Code Text screen, it’s possible to display the explanation of user’s own M code.
M01 OPTIONAL STOP
M01 will cause the part program to stop
execution only if the OPTIONAL STOP
function is active. This is usually a
push button on the operator panel. Explanation of M code
If the optional stop becomes active, the
operator will be required to press the
cycle start button to continue.

[ TEXT ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

(Example of Mcode Text screen)

- 122 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER

D.2 AUXILIARY EXPLANATION ON THE CUSTOMIZING


METHOD OF “M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION”
This section is the auxiliary explanation on the customizing method of “M Code Support Function” for
MANUAL GUIDE 0i.
This customization is done by making conversational macro program.

NOTE
1 There is restriction on the macro program number which MTB can use. Refer to section
“C.2 RESTRICTIONS ON MACRO PROGRAM NUMBER”.
2 On the specifications of system variables (#8xxx) and command of screen display such
as G243, refer to “FANUC Series 0i/0i-Mate MODEL D Macro Executor
PROGRAMMING MANUAL”(B-64303EN-2)

D.2.1 Customizing Method of M Code Help Screen

D.2.1.1 Displaying Method of M Code List


Making macro programs for displaying user’s own M code list
(1) Example of macro program for displaying the 1st page of M code list
O 8917;
M98 Pxxxx Changing language for display (See D.2.1.3)
G240 P 6 L0C0 Specify color of display message
G243 X1 Y1 P1168
G243 X1 Y2 P1169
G243 X1 Y3 P1170 (a) Specify display position ”X_Y_” of M code.
G243 X1 Y4 P1171 (b) As “Pnnnn”, specify sequence number of message
G243 X1 Y5 P1172 defined in the other program.(See D.2.1.2)
G243 X1 Y6 P1173
G243 X1 Y7 P1174
G243 X1 Y8 P1175
G243 X1 Y9 P1176
M98 P8959 Make sure program this line
M99
(2) Example of macro program for displaying the 2nd page of M code list
O 8918;
M98 Pxxxx
G240 P 6 L0C0
G243 X1 Y1 P1177
G243 X1 Y2 P1178
G243 X1 Y3 P1179
G243 X1 Y4 P1180
G243 X1 Y5 P1181
G243 X1 Y6 P1182
G243 X1 Y7 P1183
G243 X1 Y8 P1184
G243 X1 Y9 P1185
M98 P8959
M99

- 123 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

(3) Example of macro program for displaying the 3rd page of M code list
O 8919;
M98 Pxxxx
G240 P 6 L0C0
G243 X1 Y1 P1186
G243 X1 Y2 P1187
G243 X1 Y3 P1188
G243 X1 Y4 P1189
M98 P8959
M99

NOTE
1 Number of M-code which can be displayed on one page of M-code list is within
9.
2 Number of page of M-code list is within 3 pages.
3 M-code number which can be specified is M00 through M99.

D.2.1.2 Defining Message to Display on the M Code List


Message displayed on the M-code list is defined by macro program.
Decide the macro program number by MTB.
(1) Example of Japanese message
Oyyyy;
N1168 (' M00 プログラムストップ')
N1169 (' M01 オプショナルストップ')
N1170 (' M02 プログラムエンド')
Inside of “( )” belong the sequence number Nxxxx,
N1171 (' M03 主軸正転') define message displayed on the 1st page of M-code
N1172 (' M04 主軸逆転') list
N1173 (' M05 主軸停止')
N1174 (' M06 工具交換')
N1175 (' M07 液クーラント')
N1176 (' M08 ミストクーラント')
N1177 (' M09 クーラントオフ')
N1178 (' M19 主軸オリエンテーション')
N1179 (' M30 プログラムストップとリワインド')
N1180 (' M48 主軸速度オーバーライド有効') Inside of “( )” belong the sequence number Nxxxx,
N1181 (' M49 主軸速度オーバーライド 100%') define message displayed on the 2nd page of M-code
list
N1182 (' M67 モーター 1 起動')
N1183 (' M68 モーター 2 起動')
N1184 (' M69 モーター 3 起動')
N1185 (' M77 モーター 1 停止')
N1186 (' M78 モーター 2 停止')
Inside of “( )” belong the sequence number Nxxxx,
N1187 (' M79 モーター 3 停止') define message displayed on the 3rd page of M-code
N1188 (' M98 サブプログラム呼び出し') list
N1189 (' M99 サブプログラム戻り')
N9999 M99

* About the example of message that Manual Guide 0i displays in each language, refer to the
section “D.2.4 Ample of Messages in Each Language”

- 124 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER

D.2.1.3 Changing Message according to the selected display


language
Making macro program for changing display language of message.
According to the display language, set the macro program number of defining message corresponding to
the display language to the macro system valiable #8509.
Decide the macro program number by MTB.
(1) Example of macro program for changing display language of the message
Oxxxx;
#8509 = 8700 /* Set the macro program number of defining English message.
N100 IF [P3281 EQ 1] THEN /* When Japanese is selected,
#8509 = 8701 /* set the macro program number of defining Japanese message.
GOTO 999
ENDIF
IF [P3281 EQ 4] THEN /* Whe Chinese (Traditional character) is selected,
#8509 = 8702 /* set the macro program number of defining Chinese message.
GOTO 999
ENDIF
N101 IF [P3281 EQ 2] THEN /* When Germany is selected,
#8509 = 8703 /* set the macro program number of defining German message.
GOTO 999
ENDIF
IF [P3281 EQ 3] THEN /* When French is selected,
#8509 = 8704 /* set the macro program number of defining French message.
GOTO 999
ENDIF
N102 IF [P3281 EQ 5] THEN /* When Italian is selected,
#8509 = 8705 /* set the macro program number of defining Italian message.
GOTO 999 /*
ENDIF
IF [P3281 EQ 7] THEN /* When Spanish is selected,
#8509 = 8706 /* set the macro program number of defining Spanish message.
GOTO 999 /*
ENDIF
N103 IF [P3281 EQ 13] THEN /* When Sweidish is selected,
#8509 = 8707 /* set the macro program number of defining Swedish message.
GOTO 999 /*
ENDIF
IF [P3281 EQ 10] THEN /* When Portigue is selected,
#8509 = 8708 /* set the macro program number of defining Portigue message.
GOTO 999 /*
ENDIF
N104 IF [P3281 EQ 14] THEN /* When Czech is selected,
#8509 = 8709 /* set the macro program number of defining Czech message.
GOTO 999 /*
ENDIF
IF [P3281 EQ 11] THEN /* When Polish is selected,
#8509 = 8710 /* set the macro program number of defining Polish message.
GOTO 999 /*
ENDIF
N999 M99

- 125 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

D.2.1.4 Displaying Method of M Code Text Screen from M Code Help


Screen
Making macro program O8975 for displaying M-code text screen from M-code help screen.

(1) Example of macro program O8975


O8975; Read key-inned M-code number
#10 = #8503
IF [#10 EQ 0] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 1] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 2] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 3] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 4] GOTO 1000 Check key-inned M-code number.
IF [#10 EQ 5] GOTO 1000 If the M-code number is available, go to the
N1000.
IF [#10 EQ 6] GOTO 1000 If it is not available, go to the N9000.
IF [#10 EQ 7] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 8] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 9] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 19] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 30] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 48] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 49] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 67] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 68 || #10 EQ 69] THEN
#10 = 67
GOTO 1000
ENDIF
IF [#10 EQ 77] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 78 || #10 EQ 79] THEN
#10 = 77
GOTO 1000
ENDIF
IF [#10 EQ 98] GOTO 1000
IF [#10 EQ 99] GOTO 1000
GOTO 9000
N1000 #96832 = #10 If key-inned M-code number is available, set the
M-code number to the P-code valiable #96832.
M99
N9000 #96832 = -1
If key-inned M-code number is not available, set
M99
“-1” to the P-code valiable #96832.

D.2.2 Customizing Method of M Code Text Screen

D.2.2.1 Method od Displaying Title of M Code Explanation


Making macro program for displaying the title of M-code explanation and the others.
Use O86xx as the macro program number. And specify the M-code number to “xx”.
But, in case of specifying M67~M69, specify 67 as “xx”. In case of specifying M77~M79, specify 77
as “xx”.

- 126 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
(1) Example of macro program for displaying the title of M00 explanation

O8600;
M98 Pxxxx Change display language of message (see D.2.1.3).
G240 P 7 L0C0 Specify color of the title of message.
Specify “X0,Y0” as display position of title of M00 explanation.
G243 X0 Y0 P0971
Specify sequence number P9071 that title message of M00 explanation
M98 Pyyyy is defined.
#97008 = 8600 Display the explanation of M00 (see D.2.2.2)
M98 P8959 Set program number of this macro program.
#97007 = #97006
#97009 = 0
Make sure program these lines.
#97010 = 0
#97011 = 0
#97012 = 0
#97000 = 1
N1 M98P 8977
M99P 1

D.2.2.2 Method of Displaying M code Explanation


Making macro program for displaying M code explanation.
Decide the program number of the macro program by MTB.
(1) Example for displaying the explanation of M00
Oyyyy;
G240 P 6 L0C0
G243 X0 Y1 P0972 In order to display the explanation of M00, specify “G243X_Y_Pmmmm”.
G243 X0 Y2 P0973 Specify Pmmmm as the sequence number Nmmmm which the explanation of
G243 X0 Y3 P0974 M00 is defined. Then, specify the display position “X_Y_” for displaying the
explanation.
G243 X0 Y4 P0975
M99

D.2.2.3 Method of Defining Message for M Code Explanation


Defining the message for the explanation of M-code by a macro program.
Decide the program number of the macro program.
(1) Example for defining Japanese message for the explanation of M00
Ozzzz;
N0971 (' M00 プログラムストップ ') To the inside of “( )” follows the sequence number
N0971, specify the title for the explanation of M00.
N0972 ('M00 はパートプログラムの実行・・')
N0973 ('運転を続けるためには、・・ ') To the inside of “( )” follows the sequence number N0972
N0974 ('ことが必要になります。 ') ~N0975, specify the explanation of M00.
N0975 (' ')
N9999 M99

* About the example of message that Manual Guide 0i displays in each language, refer to the
section “D.2.4 Ample of Messages in Each Language”

- 127 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

D.2.3 Building Customized Conversational Macro Programs


Macro programs which are created by MTB are built in CNC as the divided module.
In the details, refer to the chapter “C LINKING MACRO CREATED BY MACHINE TOOL BUILDER
WITH MANUAL GUIDE 0i MACRO”.

D.2.4 Sample of Messages in Each Language


The following is sample of messages displayed in each language on the Manual Guide 0i screen.

D.2.4.1 Sample of Messages in Japanese

N0971 (' M00 プログラムストップ ')


N0972 ('M00 はパートプログラムの実行を停止させます。 ')
N0973 ('運転を続けるためには、サイクルスタートボタンを押す')
N0974 ('ことが必要になります。 ')
N0975 (' ')
N0976 (' M01 オプショナルストップ ')
N0977 ('オプショナルストップ機能が有効な時のみ、M01 はパー')
N0978 ('トプログラムの実行を停止させます。通常これは')
N0979 ('操作盤のボタンを押します。 ')
N0980 ('オプショナルストップが有効な時、運転を実行する為')
N0981 ('にはサイクルスタートボタンを押すことが必要になりま')
N0982 ('す。 ')
N0983 (' ')
N0984 (' M02 プログラムエンド ')
N0985 ('M02 はパートプログラムの実行を終了します。 ')
N0986 ('M02 実行の後、運転を再開するにはリセットキーを ')
N0987 ('押すことが必要になります。 ')
N0988 (' ')
N0989 (' M03 主軸正転 ')
N0990 ('M03 は主軸を時計回り方向に回転させます。 ')
N0991 ('主軸はプログラムされた主軸速度で回転します ')
N0992 ('主軸速度の変更は S コードでされます。 ')
N0993 (' ')
N0994 (' M04 主軸逆転 ')
N0995 ('M04 は主軸を反時計回り方向に回転させます ')
N0996 ('主軸はプログラムされた主軸速度で回転します ')
N0997 ('主軸速度の変更は S コードでされます。 ')
N0998 (' ')
N0999 (' ')
N1000 (' M05 主軸停止 ')
N1001 ('M05 主軸を停止させます。 ')
N1002 (' M06 工具交換 ')
N1003 ('M06 は機械上の工具交換の要求をします。 ')
N1004 ('工具交換マクロは主軸とクーラントの停止をし、工具')
N1005 ('交換をする為の必要な初期化をします。 ')
- 128 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1006 (' ')
N1007 (' ')
N1008 (' ')
N1009 (' ')
N1010 (' M07 液クーラントオン ')
N1011 ('M07 は機械の液クーラントをオンする為の要求です。')
N1012 ('これは切削中の工具が過熱しないようにする')
N1013 ('ため強く冷却するものです。 ')
N1014 (' ')
N1015 (' M08 ミストクーラントオン ')
N1016 ('M08 は機械のミストクーラントをオンする為の要求です')
N1017 ('これは切削負荷が小さいか、切削中に発生す')
N1018 ('る多くの熱が容易に逃げやすい材質を使用し')
N1019 ('ている場合、軽く冷却するものです。 ')
N1020 (' ')
N1021 (' ')
N1022 (' M09 クーラントオフ ')
N1023 ('M09 は機械のミスト、液クーラントの両方をオフするも ')
N1024 ('のです。これは工具がワークから離れる時等に ')
N1025 ('使います。 ')
N1026 (' ')
N1027 (' ')
N1028 (' ')
N1029 (' M19 主軸オリエンテーション要求 ')
N1030 ('M19 はスピンドルシャフトを決められた位置でロックす ')
N1031 ('る為のスピンドルオリエンテーションを行う指令です。 ')
N1032 ('この機能は工具交換サイクル等で使用されます。')
N1033 (' ')
N1034 (' M30 プログラムストップとリワインド ')
N1035 ('M30 はプログラムの実行を停止し、CNC をリセット状')
N1036 ('態にし、プログラムの頭出しを行うものです。 ')
N1037 (' ')
N1038 (' ')
N1039 (' ')
N1040 (' ')
N1041 (' ')
N1042 (' ')
N1043 (' M48 主軸速度オーバーライド有効 ')
N1044 ('M48 は操作盤上の主軸オーバーライドを有効にする')
N1045 ('ものです。 ')
N1046 ('このオーバーライドスイッチで、オペレータはプログラムを変')
N1047 ('更することなく主軸速度を変えることが出来')
N1048 ('ます。 ')
N1049 (' ')
N1050 (' M49 主軸速度オーバーライド無効 ')
N1051 ('M49 は操作盤上の主軸オーバーライドを無効にする')
N1052 ('ものです。 ')
N1053 ('このモード中は、オペレータはパートプログラムを変更 ')

- 129 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1054 ('することなく主軸速度を変えることは出来ま')
N1055 ('せん。 ')
N1056 (' ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 モーター起動指令 ')
N1058 ('M67~M69 で機械に用意されたモータを起動する ')
N1059 ('ものです。 ')
N1060 ('モータ 1 は M67 で起動され、モータ 2 は M68 で、モータ 3 は')
N1061 ('M69 で起動されます。 ')
N1062 (' ')
N1063 (' ')
N1064 (' M77 - M79 モーター停止指令 ')
N1065 ('M77~M79 は M67~M69 を使って起動したモータを ')
N1066 ('停止させるための M コードです。 ')
N1067 ('モータ 1 は M77 で、モータ 2 は M78 で、モータ 3 は M79 で停 ')
N1068 ('止させます。 ')
N1069 (' ')
N1070 (' ')
N1071 (' M98 サブプログラム呼び出し')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 はサブプログラム番号 9876 のプログラムを')
N1073 ('呼び出すものです。サブプログラムに引数を使い')
N1074 ('データを渡すことは出来ません。サブプログラムは')
N1075 ('M99 で終了します。 ')
N1076 ('注意: サブプログラムにもし M02、M30 が使われた')
N1077 ('場合、プログラムは呼び出されたプログラムに戻ら')
N1078 ('ず終了してしまいます。 ')
N1079 (' M99 サブプログラムリターン ')
N1080 ('M99 がプログラム実行中に読み込まれますと、実')
N1081 ('行は呼ばれたプログラムに戻ります。もし、プロ')
N1082 ('グラムがどこからも呼ばれずに M99 を読み込み ')
N1083 ('ますと、プログラムは終了することなく頭から ')
N1084 ('繰り返し実行されてしまいます。 ')
N1085 (' ')
N1168 (' M00 プログラムストップ')
N1169 (' M01 オプショナルストップ')
N1170 (' M02 プログラムエンド')
N1171 (' M03 主軸正転')
N1172 (' M04 主軸逆転')
N1173 (' M05 主軸停止')
N1174 (' M06 工具交換')
N1175 (' M07 液クーラント')
N1176 (' M08 ミストクーラント')
N1177 (' M09 クーラントオフ')
N1178 (' M19 主軸オリエンテーション')
N1179 (' M30 プログラムストップとリワインド')
N1180 (' M48 主軸速度オーバーライド有効')
N1181 (' M49 主軸速度オーバーライド 100%')
N1182 (' M67 モーター 1 起動')

- 130 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1183 (' M68 モーター 2 起動')
N1184 (' M69 モーター 3 起動')
N1185 (' M77 モーター 1 停止')
N1186 (' M78 モーター 2 停止')
N1187 (' M79 モーター 3 停止')
N1188 (' M98 サブプログラム呼び出し')
N1189 (' M99 サブプログラム戻り')

D.2.4.2 Sample of Messages in English


N0971 (' M00 PROGRAM STOP ')
N0972 ('M00 will cause the part program to stop ')
N0973 ('execution. In order to continue, the ')
N0974 ('operator will be required to press the ')
N0975 ('cycle start key. ')
N0976 (' M01 OPTIONAL STOP ')
N0977 ('M01 will cause the part program to stop ')
N0978 ('execution only if the OPTIONAL STOP ')
N0979 ('function is active. This is usually a ')
N0980 ('push button on the operator panel. ')
N0981 ('If the optional stop becomes active, the')
N0982 ('operator will be required to press the ')
N0983 ('cycle start button to continue. ')
N0984 (' M02 PROGRAM END ')
N0985 ('M02 will cause the part program to ')
N0986 ('terminate execution. After execution of')
N0987 ('an M02, the operator must press RESET to')
N0988 ('re-start execution. ')
N0989 (' M03 SPINDLE CW ')
N0990 ('M03 requests starting the spindle in the')
N0991 ('clockwise direction. The spindle will ')
N0992 ('run at the programmed spindle speed. ')
N0993 ('Changing speed is done with an S-code. ')
N0994 (' M04 SPINDLE CCW ')
N0995 ('M04 requests starting the spindle in the')
N0996 ('counter-clockwise direction. The ')
N0997 ('spindle will run at the programmed ')
N0998 ('spindle speed. Changing the speed is ')
N0999 ('done with an S-code. ')
N1000 (' M05 SPINDLE STOP ')
N1001 ('M05 requests stopping the spindle. ')
N1002 (' M06 TOOL CHANGE ')
N1003 ('M06 requests a tool change on the ')
N1004 ('machine. The tool change macro should ')
N1005 ('stop the spindle and coolant, and then ')
N1006 ('initiate the necessary actions to ')
N1007 ('perform the tool change. ')
N1008 ('At the end of the tool change, the ')
N1009 ('spindle remains turned off. ')
N1010 (' M07 FLOOD COOLANT ON ')
N1011 ('M07 requests turning on the flood ')
- 131 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1012 ('coolant on the machine. This is a heavy')


N1013 ('flow of coolant intended to keep the ')
N1014 ('cutting tool from overheating. ')
N1015 (' M08 MIST COOLANT ON ')
N1016 ('M08 requests turning on the mist ')
N1017 ('coolant on the machine. This is a light')
N1018 ('flow of coolant for use when cutting ')
N1019 ('forces are low, or the material easily ')
N1020 ('dissipates much of the heat generated ')
N1021 ('during cutting cycles. ')
N1022 (' M09 COOLANT OFF ')
N1023 ('M09 turns off both flood and mist ')
N1024 ('coolant on the machine. This function ')
N1025 ('is useful when the tool is away from ')
N1026 ('the part and requires inspection. ')
N1027 ('M05 and M06 should also turn off the ')
N1028 ('coolant, but that cannot be guaranteed. ')
N1029 (' M19 SPINDLE ORIENT REQUEST ')
N1030 ('M19 requests orienting the spindle ')
N1031 ('in order to lock the spindle shaft in a ')
N1032 ('known position. This feature is useful ')
N1033 ('during tool change cycles. ')
N1034 (' M30 PROGRAM STOP AND REWIND ')
N1035 ('M30 stops execution of the current ')
N1036 ('part program and issues a reset and ')
N1037 ('rewind request to the CNC. This request')
N1038 ('is also passed to the machine control ')
N1039 ('software to reset modal M-codes. ')
N1040 ('Execution of the part program from the ')
N1041 ('beginning is possible simply by pressing')
N1042 ('cycle start. ')
N1043 (' M48 SPDL SPEED OVERRIDE ALLOWED ')
N1044 ('M48 enables the functionality of the ')
N1045 ('spindle override selector on the ')
N1046 ('operator panel. With this selector, ')
N1047 ('the operator can modify the spindle ')
N1048 ('speed without modifying the part ')
N1049 ('program. ')
N1050 (' M49 SPDL SPEED OVERRIDE NOT ALLOWED ')
N1051 ('M49 inhibits the functionality of the ')
N1052 ('spindle override selector on the ')
N1053 ('operator panel. In this mode, the ')
N1054 ('operator is not permitted to modify ')
N1055 ('the spindle speed without changing ')
N1056 ('the part program. ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 Motor Start Commands ')
N1058 ('M67 through M69 are M-codes provided to ')
N1059 ('turn on a device on the machine. These ')
N1060 ('devices may commonly be referred to as ')
N1061 ('motors. Motor 1 is started by ')
N1062 ('programming M67, motor 2 with M68, and ')
N1063 ('motor 3 with M69. ')
- 132 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1064 (' M77 - M79 Motor Stop Commands ')
N1065 ('M77 through M79 are M-codes provided to ')
N1066 ('turn off a device on the machine. These')
N1067 ('devices may commonly be referred to as ')
N1068 ('motors. Motor 1 is stopped by ')
N1069 ('programming M77, motor 2 with M78, and ')
N1070 ('motor 3 with M79. ')
N1071 (' M98 SUBPROGRAM CALL ')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 WILL CALL SUBPROGRAM NUMBER ')
N1073 ('9876. ARGUMENTS CANNOT BE PASSED TO THE ')
N1074 ('SUBPROGRAM. THE SUBPROGRAM CALLED SHOULD')
N1075 ('TERMINATE WITH AN M99. ')
N1076 ('CAUTION: IF M02 OR M30 ARE USED IN THE ')
N1077 ('SUBPROGRAM, THE PROGRAM WILL NOT RETURN ')
N1078 ('TO THE CALLING PROGRAM AND TERMINATE. ')
N1079 (' M99 RETURN FROM SUBPROGRAM ')
N1080 ('WHEN M99 IS ENCOUNTERED DURING PROGRAM ')
N1081 ('EXECUTION, IT WILL RETURN TO THE CALLING')
N1082 ('PROGRAM. IF THE PROGRAM WAS EXECUTED ')
N1083 ('WITHOUT A CALLING PROGRAM, THE PROGRAM ')
N1084 ('WILL LOOP TO THE BEGINNING AND REPEAT ')
N1085 ('INDEFINITELY. ')
N1168 (' M00 PROGRAM STOP')
N1169 (' M01 OPTIONAL STOP')
N1170 (' M02 PROGRAM END')
N1171 (' M03 SPINDLE CW')
N1172 (' M04 SPINDLE CCW')
N1173 (' M05 SPINDLE STOP')
N1174 (' M06 TOOL CHANGE')
N1175 (' M07 FLOOD COOLANT')
N1176 (' M08 MIST COOLANT')
N1177 (' M09 COOLANT OFF')
N1178 (' M19 SPINDLE ORIENT')
N1179 (' M30 PROGRAM STOP AND REWIND')
N1180 (' M48 SPDL SPEED OVERRIDE ALLOWED')
N1181 (' M49 SPDL SPEED OVERRIDE 100 PERCENT')
N1182 (' M67 START MOTOR 1')
N1183 (' M68 START MOTOR 2')
N1184 (' M69 START MOTOR 3')
N1185 (' M77 STOP MOTOR 1')
N1186 (' M78 STOP MOTOR 2')
N1187 (' M79 STOP MOTOR 3')
N1188 (' M98 SUBPROGRAM CALL')
N1189 (' M99 RETURN FROM SUBPROGRAM')

D.2.4.3 Sample of Messages in Germany


N0971 (' M00 PROGRAMMHALT')
N0972 ('M00 veranlasst das Teileprogramm, die')
N0973 ('Ausfuhrung anzuhalten. Um die Ausfuhrung')
N0974 ('danach fortzusetzen, muss die Zyklus-')
N0975 ('start-Taste betatigt werden. ')

- 133 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N0976 (' M01 OPTIONALER HALT')


N0977 ('M01 veranlasst das Teileprogramm, die')
N0978 ('Ausfuhrung dann anzuhalten, wenn die')
N0979 ('Funktion "Optionaler Halt" aktiv ist.')
N0980 ('Normalerweise ist das ein Drucktaster am')
N0981 ('Bedienfeld. Nach einem Optionalen Halt)
N0982 ('muss die Zyklusstart-Taste gedruckt')
N0983 ('werden, um die Ausfuhrung fortzusetzen.')
N0984 (' M02 PROGRAMMENDE ')
N0985 ('M02 veranlasst das Teileprogramm, die')
N0986 ('Ausfuhrung zu beenden. Um die Ausfuhrung')
N0987 ('danach neu zu starten, muss RESET)
N0988 ('gedruckt werden. ')
N0989 (' M03 SPINDEL IM US')
N0990 ('M03 veranlasst die Spindeldrehung im')
N0991 ('Uhrzeigersinn. Die Spindel dreht mit der')
N0992 ('programmierten Spindeldrehzahl.')
N0993 ('Ein S-Code andert die Spindeldrehzahl.')
N0994 (' M04 SPINDEL GEGEN US')
N0995 ('M04 veranlasst die Spindeldrehung')
N0996 ('gegen den Uhrzeigersinn. Die Spindel')
N0997 ('dreht mit der programmierten Spindel-')
N0998 ('drehzahl. Zum Andern der Spindeldreh-')
N0999 ('zahl verwenden Sie einen S-Code.')
N1000 (' M05 SPINDELHALT ')
N1001 ('M05 halt die Spindel an. ')
N1002 (' M06 WERKZEUGWECHSEL ')
N1003 ('M06 veranlasst einen Werkzeugwechsel an')
N1004 ('der Maschine. Ein Werkzeugwechsel-Makro')
N1005 ('sollte Spindel und Kuhlmittel stoppen')
N1006 ('und alle weiteren Vorbereitungen fur den')
N1007 ('Werkzeugwechsel einleiten.')
N1008 ('Nach dem Werkzeugwechsel bleibt die')
N1009 ('Spindel ausgeschaltet. ')
N1010 (' M07 SPULKUHLMITTEL EIN')
N1011 ('M07 schaltet die Kuhlmittelspulung an')
N1012 ('der Maschine ein, einen starken)
N1013 ('Kuhlmittelstrom, der das Schneidwerkzeug')
N1014 ('vor Uberhitzung schutzen soll. ')
N1015 (' M08 KUHMITTELNEBEL EIN')
N1016 ('M08 fordert Kuhlmittelnebel von der')
N1017 ('Maschine an, einen leichten Spruhstrom,')
N1018 ('wenn nur geringe Schneidkrafte wirken')
N1019 ('oder das Material die wahrend der')
N1020 ('Bearbeitung erzeugte Hitze ohne')
N1021 ('Probleme ableiten kann.')
N1022 (' M09 KUHLMITTEL AUS')
N1023 ('M09 schaltet sowohl Spul- als auch')
N1024 ('Spruhkuhlmittel aus. Wird normalerweise')
N1025 ('eingesetzt, wenn das Werkstuck zur')
N1026 ('Inspektion vom Werkstuck abgesetzt ist.')
N1027 ('Kuhlmittelabschaltung ist auch mit M05')
- 134 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1028 ('und M06 moglich, aber nicht so sicher.')
N1029 (' M19 SPINDELORIENTIERUNG')
N1030 ('M19 fordert eine Spindelorientierung an,')
N1031 ('bei der die Spindelwelle in einer')
N1032 ('bekannten Position arretiert.')
N1033 ('Hilfreich beim Werkzeugwechsel.')
N1034 (' M30 PROGRAMM ANHALTEN + ANFANG SUCHEN')
N1035 ('M30 stoppt die Ausfuhrung des aktuellen')
N1036 ('Teileprogramms und lost ein "Reset &')
N1037 ('Rucksetzen" aus. Die Anforderung wird')
N1038 ('auch an die Maschinensteuerung gegeben,')
N1039 ('damit sie modale M-Codes rucksetzt.')
N1040 ('Um danach die Programmausfuhrung')
N1041 ('von Anfang an zu starten, drucken Sie ')
N1042 ('nur die Zyklusstart-Taste. ')
N1043 (' M48 SPINDELDREHZAHL-OVERRIDE ERLAUBT')
N1044 ('M48 schaltet den Ubersteuerungsschalter')
N1045 ('fur die Spindeldrehzahl am Bedienfeld')
N1046 ('frei. Mit diesem Wahlschalter kann die')
N1047 ('Spindeldrehzahl variiert werden ohne')
N1048 ('das Teileprogramm zu verandern.')
N1049 (' ')
N1050 (' M49 SPINDELDREHZ-OVERR. NICHT ERLAUBT')
N1051 ('M49 sperrt den Ubersteuerungsschalter')
N1052 ('fur die Spindeldrehzahl am Bedienfeld.')
N1053 ('In diesem Modus kann die Spindeldrehzahl')
N1054 ('nur im Teileprogramm geandert werden.')
N1055 (' ')
N1056 (' ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 Motorstartbefehle')
N1058 ('M67 mit M69 sind M-Codes, die zum')
N1059 ('Einschalten von Geraten an der Maschine')
N1060 ('dienen. Die Gerate sollen hier einfach')
N1061 ('"Motoren" heisen. ')
N1062 ('M67 im Programm startet den Motor 1,')
N1063 ('M68 den Motor 2, M69 den Motor 3. ')
N1064 (' M77 - M79 Motorstoppbefehle ')
N1065 ('M77 mit M79 sind M-Codes, die zum')
N1066 ('Ausschalten von Geraten an der Maschine')
N1067 ('dienen. Die Gerate sollen hier einfach')
N1068 ('"Motoren" heisen. ')
N1069 ('M77 im Programm stoppt den Motor 1,')
N1070 ('M78 den Motor 2, M79 den Motor 3. ')
N1071 (' M98 UNTERPROGRAMMAUFRUF ')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 RUFT DAS UNTERPROGRAMM NUMMER')
N1073 ('9876 AUF. AN DAS U-PROGRAMM KONNEN KEINE')
N1074 ('ARGUMENTE UBERGEBEN WERDEN. BEENDEN SIE')
N1075 ('DAS AUFGERUFENE UNTERPROGRAMM MIT M99.')
N1076 ('ACHTUNG: WENN DAS UNTERPROGRAMM M02 ODER')
N1077 ('M30 ENTHALT, KEHRT ES NICHT ZUR BEENDI-')
N1078 ('GUNG ZUM AUFRUFENDEN PROGRAMM ZURUCK.')
N1079 (' M99 RUCKKEHR VOM UNTERPROGRAMM')
- 135 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1080 ('M99 BEWIRKT BEI DER PROGRAMMAUSFUHRUNG')


N1081 ('DIE RUCKKEHR ZUM AUFRUFENDEN PROGRAMM.')
N1082 ('WURDE DAS PROGRAMM VON KEINEM ANDEREN')
N1083 ('PROGRAMM AUFGERUFEN, ERFOLGT EINE RUCK-')
N1084 ('KEHR ZUM PROGRAMMANFANG, UND ES ENTSTEHT')
N1085 ('EINE ENDLOSSCHLEIFE. ')
N1168 (' M00 PROGRAMMHALT')
N1169 (' M01 OPTIONALER HALT')
N1170 (' M02 PROGRAMMENDE')
N1171 (' M03 SPINDEL IM US')
N1172 (' M04 SPINDEL GEGEN US')
N1173 (' M05 SPINDELHALT')
N1174 (' M06 WERKZEUGWECHSEL')
N1175 (' M07 SPULKUHLMITTEL')
N1176 (' M08 KUHLMITTELNEBEL')
N1177 (' M09 KUHLMITTEL AUS')
N1178 (' M19 SPINDELORIENTIERUNG')
N1179 (' M30 PROGRAMM ANHALTEN + ANFANG SUCHEN')
N1180 (' M48 SPINDELDREHZAHL-OVERRIDE ERLAUBT')
N1181 (' M49 SPINDELDREHZAHL-OVERRIDE 100 %')
N1182 (' M67 MOTOR 1 STARTEN')
N1183 (' M68 MOTOR 2 STARTEN')
N1184 (' M69 MOTOR 3 STARTEN')
N1185 (' M77 MOTOR 1 STOPPEN')
N1186 (' M78 MOTOR 2 STOPPEN')
N1187 (' M79 MOTOR 3 STOPPEN')
N1188 (' M98 UNTERPROGRAMMAUFRUF')
N1189 (' M99 RUCKKEHR VOM UNTERPROGRAMM')

D.2.4.4 Sample of Messages in Italy


N0971 (' M00 ARRESTO PROGRAMMA')
N0972 ('M00 ferma l''esecuzione del programma')
N0973 ('pezzo. Per continuare, l''ope-')
N0974 ('ratore deve premere il pulsante')
N0975 ('cycle start. ')
N0976 (' M01 ARRESTO OPZIONALE ')
N0977 ('M01 ferma l''esecuzione del programma')
N0978 ('pezzo solo se e attiva la funzione ARRE-')
N0979 ('STO OPZIONALE. (Normalmente, e')
N0980 ('un pulsante del pannello operatore.')
N0981 ('Se la funzione e attiva, per continuare')
N0982 ('si deve premere il pulsante')
N0983 ('cycle start. ')
N0984 (' M02 FINE PROGRAMMA')
N0985 ('M02 Mette fine all''esecuzione del ')
N0986 ('programma pezzo. Dopo un M02,')
N0987 ('l''operatore deve premere RESET per')
N0988 ('riavviare l''esecuzione.')
N0989 (' M03 ROT.MANDRINO IN SENSO ORARIO')
N0990 ('M03 avvia la rotazione del mandrino in')
N0991 ('senso orario. Il mandrino')
- 136 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N0992 ('ruotera alla velocita programmata. ')
N0993 ('Questa si specifica con un codice S. ')
N0994 (' M04 ROT.MANDRINO IN SENSO ANTIORARIO')
N0995 ('M04 avvia la rotazione del mandrino in')
N0996 ('senso antiorario. Il')
N0997 ('mandrino ruotera alla velocita pro-')
N0998 ('grammata. Questa si specifica con ')
N0999 ('un codice S. ')
N1000 (' M05 ARRESTO MANDRINO ')
N1001 ('M05 ferma la rotazione del mandrino.')
N1002 (' M06 CAMBIO UTENSILE')
N1003 ('M06 richiede un cambio utensile sulla ')
N1004 ('macchina. La macro di cambio utensile')
N1005 ('deve fermare il mandrino e il refrige-')
N1006 ('rante ed avviare le azioni necessarie')
N1007 ('per eseguire il cambio utensile.')
N1008 ('Alla fine del cambio utensile, il man- ')
N1009 ('drino sara inattivo. ')
N1010 (' M07 REFRIGERANTE A GETTO')
N1011 ('M07 attiva il getto di refrigerante ')
N1012 ('sulla macchina. Si tratta di un getto')
N1013 ('di refrigerante inteso ad evitare il')
N1014 ('surriscaldamento dell''utensile.')
N1015 (' M08 REFRIGERANTE A NEBBIA')
N1016 ('M08 attiva il refrigerante a nebbia')
N1017 ('sulla macchina. Si tratta di un getto')
N1018 ('meno intenso di refrigerante usato quan-')
N1019 ('do le forze di taglio sono basse o il')
N1020 ('materiale dissipa la maggior parte del')
N1021 ('calore generato dalla lavorazione. ')
N1022 (' M09 REFRIGERANTE DISATTIVATO')
N1023 ('M09 disattiva ambedue i tipi di refrige-')
N1024 ('rante sulla macchina. Questa funzione')
N1025 ('e utile quando l''utensile e lontano')
N1026 ('dal pezzo per l''ispezione. ')
N1027 ('M05 e M06 dovrebbero disattivare il re-')
N1028 ('frig., ma cio non puo essere garantito. ')
N1029 (' M19 ORIENTAMENTO MANDRINO ')
N1030 ('M19 richiede l''orientamento del man- ')
N1031 ('drino per bloccarlo in una posizione')
N1032 ('nota. Questa funzione e utile')
N1033 ('durante i cicli di cambio utensile.')
N1034 (' M30 ARRESTO PROGR. E RIAVVOLGIMENTO')
N1035 ('M30 ferma l''esecuzione del programma')
N1036 ('pezzo, esegue un reset e riporta il pro-')
N1037 ('gramma all''inizio. Il comando')
N1038 ('viene inviato al PMC per il reset dei')
N1039 ('codici M modali. ')
N1040 ('Il programma puo essere rieseguito dal-')
N1041 ('l''inizio premendo semplicemente il')
N1042 ('pulsante cycle start. ')

- 137 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1043 (' M48 REG. VELOC. MANDRINO ABILITATA')


N1044 ('M48 abilita il selettore della regola-')
N1045 ('zione della velocita del mandrino sul')
N1046 ('pannello operatore. Questo selettore')
N1047 ('permette di cambiare la velocita del ')
N1048 ('mandrino senza modificare il programma')
N1049 ('pezzo. ')
N1050 (' M49 REG. VELOC. MANDRINO DISABIL.')
N1051 ('M49 inibisce il selettore della regola-')
N1052 ('zione della velocita del mandrino sul')
N1053 ('pannello operatore. In questo modo')
N1054 ('non e possibile cambiare la velocita')
N1055 ('del mandrino senza modificare il pro-')
N1056 ('gramma pezzo. ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 comandi di avvio motori')
N1058 ('M67-M69 sono forniti per attiva-')
N1059 ('re i dispositivi della macchina. Questi')
N1060 ('dispositivi possono essere detti comune-')
N1061 ('mente motori. Il motore 1 si avvia con')
N1062 ('M67, il motore 2 con M68, e il motore 3')
N1063 ('con M69. ')
N1064 (' M77 - M79 Comandi di arresto motori')
N1065 ('M77-M79 sono forniti per disattivare i')
N1066 ('dispositivi della macchina. Questi')
N1067 ('dispositivi possono essere detti comune-')
N1068 ('mente motori. Il motore 1 si ferma con')
N1069 ('M77, il motore 2 con M78, e il motore 3')
N1070 ('con M79. ')
N1071 (' M98 RICHIAMO SOTTOPROGRAMMA')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 RICHIAMA IL SOTTOPROGRAMMA N.')
N1073 ('9876. NON E'' POSSIBILE PASSARE ARGO-')
N1074 ('MENTI AI SOTTOPROGRAMMI, CHE DEVONO')
N1075 ('FINIRE CON UN M99. ')
N1076 ('ATTENZIONE: M02 O M30 USATI IN UN')
N1077 ('SOTTOPROGRAMMA, IMPEDISCONO IL RITORNO')
N1078 ('AL PROGRAMMA RICHIAMANTE. ')
N1079 (' M99 RITORNO DAL SOTTOPROGRAMMA')
N1080 ('QUANDO VIENE INCONTRATO M99,IL CONTROLLO')
N1081 ('RITORNA AL PROGRAMMA RICHIAMANTE.')
N1082 (' SE IL PROGR. CON M99 ERA STATO AVVIA-')
N1083 ('TO INDIPENDENTEMENTE DA UN ALTRO PRO-')
N1084 ('GRAMMA, ESSO TORNA ALL''INIZIO E VIENE')
N1085 ('RIESEGUITO INDEFINITAMENTE.')
N1168 (' M00 ARRESTO PROGRAMMA')
N1169 (' M01 ARRESTO OPZIONALE ')
N1170 (' M02 FINE PROGRAMMA')
N1171 (' M03 ROT.MANDRINO IN SENSO ORARIO')
N1172 (' M04 ROT.MANDRINO IN SENSO ANTIORARIO')
N1173 (' M05 ARRESTO MANDRINO ')
N1174 (' M06 CAMBIO UTENSILE')
N1175 (' M07 REFRIGERANTE A GETTO')
N1176 (' M08 REFRIGERANTE A NEBBIA')
- 138 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1177 (' M09 REFRIGERANTE DISATTIVATO')
N1178 (' M19 ORIENTAMENTO MANDRINO')
N1179 (' M30 ARRESTO PROGR. E RIAVVOLGIMENTO')
N1180 (' M48 REG. VELOC. MANDRINO ABILITATA')
N1181 (' M49 REG. VELOC. MANDRINO DISABILITATA')
N1182 (' M67 AVVIO MOTORE 1')
N1183 (' M68 AVVIO MOTORE 2')
N1184 (' M69 AVVIO MOTORE 3')
N1185 (' M77 ARRESTO MOTORE 1')
N1186 (' M78 ARRESTO MOTORE 2')
N1187 (' M79 ARRESTO MOTORE 3')
N1188 (' M98 RICHIAMO SOTTOPROGRAMMA')
N1189 (' M99 RITORNO DAL SOTTOPROGRAMMA')

D.2.4.5 Sample of Messages in French


N0971 (' M00 ARRET DE PROGRAMME ')
N0972 ('M00 provoquera l''arret de l''execution du')
N0973 ('programme. Pour continuer, l''operateur ')
N0974 ('devra appuyer sur la touche ')
N0975 ('depart cycle. ')
N0976 (' M01 ARRET OPTIONNEL ')
N0977 ('M01 provoquera l''arret de l''execution du')
N0978 ('programme si la fonction ARRET ')
N0979 ('OPTIONNEL est active. Il s''agit souvent ')
N0980 ('d''un bouton sur le pupitre operat. ')
N0981 ('Si l''arret optionnel est actif, l''oper.')
N0982 ('evra appuyer sur le bouton depart cycle ')
N0983 ('pour continuer. ')
N0984 (' M02 FIN DE PROGRAMME ')
N0985 ('M02 provoquera l''arret de l''execution du')
N0986 ('programme. Apres l''execution d''un M02,')
N0987 ('l''operateur doit appuyer sur RESET pour')
N0988 ('redemarrer l''exec. ')
N0989 (' M03 BROCHE EN SENS HORAIRE ')
N0990 ('M03 demande le demarrage de la broche')
N0991 ('en sens horaire. La broche tournera a ')
N0992 ('la vitesse programmee. ')
N0993 ('Le chang. de vit. se fait avec code S. ')
N0994 (' M04 BROCHE EN SENS ANTI-HORAIRE ')
N0995 ('M04 demande le demarrage de la broche')
N0996 ('en sens anti-horaire. La broche ')
N0997 ('tournera a la vitesse programmee. ')
N0998 ('Le changement de vitesse s''effectue ')
N0999 ('par un code S. ')
N1000 (' M05 ARRET DE BROCHE ')
N1001 ('M05 demande l''arret de la broche. ')
N1002 (' M06 CHANGEMENT D''OUTIL ')
N1003 ('M06 demande un changement d''outil ')
N1004 ('a la machine. La macro de changement ')
N1005 ('d''outil arrete la broche et l''arrosage, ')
N1006 ('puis initie les actions necessaires ')
- 139 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1007 ('pour le chang. d''out. ')


N1008 ('A la fin du changement d''outil, la ')
N1009 ('la broche reste arretee. ')
N1010 (' M07 ARROSAGE A FLOT ACTIF ')
N1011 ('M07 demande l''activation de l''arros. ')
N1012 ('a flot sur la machine. Il s''agit d''un')
N1013 ('debit important d''arrosage pour eviter ')
N1014 ('la surchauffe de l''outil. ')
N1015 (' M08 ARROSAGE BROUILLARD ACTIF ')
N1016 ('M08 demande l''activation de ')
N1017 ('l''arrosage brouillard sur la machine.')
N1018 ('Arrosage leger utilise pour couper ')
N1019 ('a moindre effort ou si matiere dissipe ')
N1020 ('facilement la chaleur generee par les ')
N1021 ('cycles d''usinage. ')
N1022 (' M09 ARRET ARROSAGE ')
N1023 ('M09 coupe les arrosages a flot et ')
N1024 ('brouillard de la machine. Cette fonction')
N1025 ('est utile lorsque l''outil est eloigne ')
N1026 ('de la piece et demande une inspection. ')
N1027 ('M05 et M06 doivent aussi couper ')
N1028 ('l''arrosage, mais ce n''est pas garanti. ')
N1029 (' M19 DEMANDE D''ORIENTATION DE BROCHE ')
N1030 ('M19 demande l''orientation de la ')
N1031 ('broche afin de la verrouiller dans une ')
N1032 ('verrouiller dans une position connue. ')
N1033 ('Utile pour chang. d''outil. ')
N1034 (' M30 ARRET PROGRAMME ET REMBOBINAGE ')
N1035 ('M30 Arrete l''execution du programme ')
N1036 ('piece actuel, reinitialise et ')
N1037 ('rembobine pour la CNC. Cette demande')
N1038 ('passe egalement au logiciel de contr. ')
N1039 ('mach. pour reinit. codes M mod.. ')
N1040 ('Execution du programme piece possible ')
N1041 ('a partir du debut en appuyant simplement')
N1042 ('depart cycle. ')
N1043 (' M48 MODUL. VITESSE DE BROCHE PERMISE ')
N1044 ('M48 valide la fonctionnalite du ')
N1045 ('select. de modul. de broche du ')
N1046 ('pupitre operateur. Avec ce ce sel., ')
N1047 ('l''operateur peut modifier la vitesse ')
N1048 ('de la broche sans modifier le ')
N1049 ('prgr. piece. ')
N1050 (' M49 MODUL. VITESSE BROCHE INTERDITE ')
N1051 ('M49 interdit la fonction du selecteur ')
N1052 ('de modul. de broche sur le pupitre ')
N1053 ('operateur. Dans ce mode, l''operateur ')
N1054 ('n''est pas autorise a modifier la vit. ')
N1055 ('de broche sans modifier le progr. ')
N1056 ('piece. ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 Commandes demarrage moteur ')
N1058 ('M67 a M69 sont des codes M fournis pour ')
- 140 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1059 ('activer un dispositif de la machine. Ces')
N1060 ('dispositifs sont souvent les moteurs ')
N1061 ('Le moteur 1 est demarre en ')
N1062 ('programmant M67, le moteur 2 avec M68 ')
N1063 ('et le moteur 3 avec M69. ')
N1064 (' M77 - M79 Commandes d''arret moteur ')
N1065 ('M77 a M79 sont des codes M fournis pour ')
N1066 ('activer un dispositif de la machine. Ces')
N1067 ('dispositifs sont souvent les moteurs ')
N1068 ('Le moteur 1 est arrete en programmant ')
N1069 ('M77, le moteur 2 avec M78 et ')
N1070 ('le moteur 3 avec M79. ')
N1071 (' M98 APPEL DE SOUS-PROGRAMME ')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 APPELLERA LE NUMERO DE SOUS- ')
N1073 ('PROGRAMME 9876. LES ARGUMENTS NE PEUVENT')
N1074 ('PASSER AU SOUS-PROGRAMME. LE SOUS-PROGR.')
N1075 ('APPELE DOIT FINIR AVEC M99. ')
N1076 ('ATTENTION: SI M02 OU M30 SONT UTILISES ')
N1077 ('DANS LE SOUS-PROGR., LE PROGRAMME NE ')
N1078 ('REVIENDRA PAS AU PROG D''APP ET FINIRA. ')
N1079 (' M99 REVIENT DU SOUS-PROGRAMME ')
N1080 ('LORSQUE M99 EST RENCONTRE PENDANT L''EXEC')
N1081 ('D''UN PROG, IL REVIENDRA AU PROG D''APPEL')
N1082 ('SI LE PROG. ETAIT EXECUTE SANS APPELER ')
N1083 ('DE PROGRAMME, LE PROGRAMME SE ')
N1084 ('REPETERA INDEFINIMENT. ')
N1085 (' ')
N1168 (' M00 ARRET DE PROGRAMME')
N1169 (' M01 ARRET OPTIONNEL')
N1170 (' M02 FIN DE PROGRAMME')
N1171 (' M03 BROCHE EN SENS HORAIRE')
N1172 (' M04 BROCHE EN SENS ANTI-HORAIRE')
N1173 (' M05 ARRET DE BROCHE')
N1174 (' M06 CHANGEMENT D''OUTIL')
N1175 (' M07 ARROSAGE A FLOT')
N1176 (' M08 ARROSAGE BROUILLARD')
N1177 (' M09 ARRET ARROSAGE')
N1178 (' M19 ORIENTATION DE BROCHE')
N1179 (' M30 ARRET DE PROGRAMME ET REMBOBINAGE')
N1180 (' M48 MODULATION VIT. DE BROCHE PERMISE')
N1181 (' M49 MODULATION VITESSE DE BROCHE 100%')
N1182 (' M67 DEMARRAGE MOTEUR 1')
N1183 (' M68 DEMARRAGE MOTEUR 2')
N1184 (' M69 DEMARRAGE MOTEUR 3')
N1185 (' M77 ARRET MOTEUR 1')
N1186 (' M78 ARRET MOTEUR 2')
N1187 (' M79 ARRET MOTEUR 3')
N1188 (' M98 APPEL DE SOUS-PROGRAMME')
N1189 (' M99 RETOUR D''UN SOUS-PROGRAMME')

- 141 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

D.2.4.6 Sample of Messages in Spanish


N0971 (' M00 PARADA PROGRAMADA ')
N0972 ('M00 hara que el prog. pieza pare ')
N0973 ('la ejec. Para continuar, se pedira ')
N0974 ('al oper. que pulse la tecla de inicio ')
N0975 ('de ciclo. ')
N0976 (' M01 PARADA OPCIONAL ')
N0977 ('M01 hara que el prog. de pieza deje de')
N0978 ('ejecutarse solo si esta acti. la funcion')
N0979 ('PARADA OPCIONAL. Esta se activa con')
N0980 ('un pulsador del panel de operador. ')
N0981 ('Si la parada opc. se activa, se pedira')
N0982 ('al operador que pulse el boton de ini. ')
N0983 ('de ciclo para continuar. ')
N0984 (' M02 FIN PROGRAMA ')
N0985 ('M02 detiene la ejec. del programa ')
N0986 ('pieza. Despues de ejecutar M02,')
N0987 ('el operador debe pulsar RESET para')
N0988 ('reanudar la ejecuc. ')
N0989 (' M03 CABEZAL HORARIO ')
N0990 ('M03 pide que se arranque el cabezal en')
N0991 ('sentido horario. El cabezal girara a la ')
N0992 ('vel. programada. Para cambiar la ')
N0993 ('vel., utilice un codigo S. ')
N0994 (' M04 CABEZAL ANTIHORARIO ')
N0995 ('M04 pide que se arranque el cabezal')
N0996 ('en sentido antihorario. Este girara a ')
N0997 ('la velocidad programada. ')
N0998 ('Para cambiar la velocidad, utilizar ')
N0999 ('un codigo S. ')
N1000 (' M05 PARADA CABEZAL ')
N1001 ('M05 pide la parada del cabezal. ')
N1002 (' M06 CAMBIAR HTA ')
N1003 ('M06 pide un cambio de hta en la ')
N1004 ('maquina. La macro de cambio de hta ')
N1005 ('debe detener el cab. y el refrigerante ')
N1006 ('y luego iniciar las acciones necesarias')
N1007 ('para cambiar la herramienta. ')
N1008 ('Al final del cambio de herramienta, el ')
N1009 ('cabezal permanece desconectado ')
N1010 ('M07 CONECTAR CHORRO REFRIG. ')
N1011 ('M07 pide conectar chorro refrigerante')
N1012 ('en la maquina. Se trata de un potente')
N1013 ('chorro de refrigerante para impedir ')
N1014 ('que se recaliente la herramienta ')
N1015 (' M08 CONECTAR NEBLINA REFRI. ')
N1016 ('M08 pide conectar la neblina del ')
N1017 ('refri. en la maq. Se trata de un flujo')
N1018 ('lig. de refri. para cuando los esf. ')
N1019 ('de corte sean pequenos o el material ')

- 142 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1020 ('disipe facilm. una gran parte del calor')
N1021 ('generado durante el cicl de corte ')
N1022 (' M09 DESC. REFRIGERANTE ')
N1023 ('M09 descon. la ducha y neblina de refri.')
N1024 ('en la maquina. Funcion practica ')
N1025 ('cuando la hta. este lejos de la pieza ')
N1026 ('y requiera inspeccion. ')
N1027 ('M05 y M06 tambien deben desconectar ')
N1028 ('el refri., pero no puede garantizarse. ')
N1029 (' M19 PETI. ORIENT. CABE. ')
N1030 ('M19 pide orientar el cabezal para ')
N1031 ('bloquear el eje de este en una pos. ')
N1032 ('conocida. Funcion prac. durante los ')
N1033 ('ciclos de cambio de hta. ')
N1034 (' M30 PARA. Y REINI. PROGRAMA ')
N1035 ('M30 detiene la ejecucion del programa ')
N1036 ('pieza actual y envia petic. de reset ')
N1037 ('y reini. al CNC. Esta peti tamb. se pasa')
N1038 ('al soft. de control de la maqui. para ')
N1039 ('resetear los codigos M modales. ')
N1040 ('Es posible ejecutar el progr. de pieza ')
N1041 ('desde el comienzo pulsando Inicio ')
N1042 ('de ciclo. ')
N1043 (' M48 PERMITIDA CORR. VEL. CABE. ')
N1044 ('M48 habilita la funciona. del selec. ')
N1045 ('de corr. de cabe. en el panel de ')
N1046 ('operador. Con este selector, el ')
N1047 ('operador puede modificar la velo. ')
N1048 ('del cabe. sin modificar el prog. ')
N1049 ('de pieza. ')
N1050 (' M49 NO PERMITIDA CORR. VEL. CABE. ')
N1051 ('M49 inhibe la func. del selector de ')
N1052 ('corr. de cabezal en el panel de. ')
N1053 ('operador. En este modo, no se ')
N1054 ('permite al ope. modificar la vel. ')
N1055 ('del cabe. sin modificar el progr. ')
N1056 ('de pieza. ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 Ordenes arranque motor ')
N1058 ('M67 hasta M69 son cod. M para conectar ')
N1059 ('un dispo. de la maquina. Estos dispo. ')
N1060 ('pueden denominarse en comun motores. ')
N1061 ('El motor 1 se arranca programando ')
N1062 ('M67, el motor 2 con M68 y el motor ')
N1063 ('3 con M69. ')
N1064 (' M77 - M79 Ordenes parada motor ')
N1065 ('M77 hasta M79 son cod. M para descon. ')
N1066 ('un dispo. de la maquina. Estos dispo.')
N1067 ('pueden denominase en comun motores. ')
N1068 ('El motor 1 se para programando ')
N1069 ('M77, el motor 2 con M78 y el motor ')
N1070 ('3 con M79. ')
N1071 (' M98 LLAMADA A SUBPROGRAMA ')
- 143 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1072 ('M98 P9876 LLAMARA AL NO. DE SUBPROGR. ')


N1073 ('9876. LOS ARGUM. NO PUEDEN PASARSE AL')
N1074 ('SUBPR. EL SUBPROGRMA LLAMADO DEBE')
N1075 ('TERMINAR CON M99. ')
N1076 ('PRECAU: SI SE UTILIZ. M02 O M30 EN EL ')
N1077 ('SUBPR., EL PROGRAMA NO VOLVERA ')
N1078 ('AL PROG. DE LLAMADA Y SE TERMIN. ')
N1079 (' M99 RETORNO DE SUBPROGRAMA ')
N1080 ('CUANDO SE ENCUENTRE M99 DURANTE EJE. ')
N1081 ('UN PROG, VOLVERA AL PROG DE LLAMADA.')
N1082 ('SI SE HA EJECUTADO EL PROG. SIN UN ')
N1083 ('PROG. DE LLAMADA, EL PROG. VOLVERA EN')
N1084 ('BUCLE AL COMIENZO Y SE REPETIRA ')
N1085 ('INDEFINIDAMENTE ')
N1168 (' M00 PARADA PROGRAMA')
N1169 (' M01 PARADA OPCIONAL')
N1170 (' M02 FIN PROGRAMA')
N1171 (' M03 CABEZAL HOR')
N1172 (' M04 CABEZAL ANTIH')
N1173 (' M05 PARADA CABEZAL')
N1174 (' M06 CAMBIAR HTA')
N1175 (' M07 CHOR REFRIG.')
N1176 (' M08 NEBLI. REFRIG.')
N1177 (' M09 DES. REFRIG.')
N1178 (' M19 ORIENT. CABEZAL')
N1179 (' M30 PARADA Y REINIC PROGRAMA')
N1180 (' M48 PERMITIDO CORRECCION VELO. CABE.')
N1181 (' M49 CORRECCION VEL. CABE. 100%')
N1182 (' M67 ARRANQUE MOTOR 1')
N1183 (' M68 ARRANQUE MOTOR 2')
N1184 (' M69 ARRANQUE MOTOR 3')
N1185 (' M77 PARADA MOTOR 1')
N1186 (' M78 PARADA MOTOR 2')
N1187 (' M79 PARADA MOTOR 3')
N1188 (' M98 LLAMADA A SUBPROGRAMA')
N1189 (' M99 RETORNO DE SUBPROGRAMA')

D.2.4.7 Sample of Messages in Chinese (Traditional character)


N0971 (' M00 程式停止')
N0972 ('M00 可使加工程式停止執行.要継続運転的話')
N0973 (',押 cycle start 鍵 ')
N0974 (' ')
N0975 (' ')
N0976 (' M01 選択性停止')
N0977 ('M01 可使加工程式停止執行,如果使用「選択 '」
N0978 ('停止)機能.通常操作方式為押操作面盤上的 ')
N0979 ('鍵.選択停止有効時,要執行運転押 CYCLE STA ')
N0980 ('RT 鍵 ')
N0981 (' ')
N0982 (' ')
N0983 (' ')
- 144 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N0984 (' M02 程式終止')
N0985 ('M02 可終止程式執行.当 M02 執行後,操作者需 ')
N0986 ('押 RESET 才可再執行程式.')
N0987 (' ')
N0988 (' ')
N0989 (' M03 主軸正転')
N0990 ('M03 可使主軸順時針方向旋転,並依程式所指 ')
N0991 ('定主軸旋転速度旋転,下 S-C0DE 可変更主軸速 ')
N0992 ('度 ')
N0993 (' ')
N0994 (' M04 主軸反転')
N0995 ('M04 可使主軸逆時針方向旋転,並依程式所指 ')
N0996 ('定主軸旋転速度旋転,下 S-C0DE 可変更主軸速 ')
N0997 ('度 ')
N0998 (' ')
N0999 (' ')
N1000 (' M05 主軸停止')
N1001 ('M05 可使主軸停止')
N1002 ('M06 刀具交換')
N1003 ('M06 可使刀具交換.刀具交換 macro 応使切削液')
N1004 ('及主軸停止,然後執行需要的初期化以使刀具 ')
N1005 ('作交換. ')
N1006 (' ')
N1007 (' ')
N1008 (' ')
N1009 (' ')
N1010 (' M07 切削液開')
N1011 ('M07 可使切削液打開,強大的切削液水流可使')
N1012 ('刀具不会過熱 ')
N1013 (' ')
N1014 (' ')
N1015 ('M08 霧化式切削液開 ')
N1016 ('M08 可使霧化式切削液打開.小水流可用在軽')
N1017 ('切削場合 or 用在切削中容易散熱的材質 ')
N1018 (' ')
N1019 (' ')
N1020 (' ')
N1021 (' ')
N1022 (' M09 切削液関')
N1023 ('M09 可関閉切削液及霧化式切削液.此機能可 ')
N1024 ('在刀具離開工件時使用 ')
N1025 (' ')
N1026 (' ')
N1027 (' ')
N1028 (' ')
N1029 ('M19 主軸定位')
N1030 ('M19 為主軸定位,此機能用在刀具交換 ')
N1031 (' ')

- 145 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1032 (' ')


N1033 (' ')
N1034 ('M30 程式停止回到程式起点 ')
N1035 ('M30 可使程式停止並重置 CNC 再回到程式起点 ')
N1036 (' ')
N1037 (' ')
N1038 (' ')
N1039 (' ')
N1040 (' ')
N1041 (' ')
N1042 (' ')
N1043 (' M48 主軸転速倍率有効')
N1044 ('M48 可使操作面盤上的主軸転速倍率有効,操')
N1045 ('作者可直接控制主軸転速不用修改程式 ')
N1046 (' ')
N1047 (' ')
N1048 (' ')
N1049 (' ')
N1050 (' M49 主軸転速倍率無効 ')
N1051 ('M49 可使操作面盤上的主軸転速倍率無効,操作')
N1052 ('者不修改程式的話就無法改変主軸転速 ')
N1053 (' ')
N1054 (' ')
N1055 (' ')
N1056 (' ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 馬達起動指令')
N1058 ('M67 到 M69 指令可起動馬達,M67 起動馬達 1,M')
N1059 ('68 起動馬達 2,M69 起動馬達 3 ')
N1060 (' ')
N1061 (' ')
N1062 (' ')
N1063 (' ')
N1064 (' M77 - M79 馬達停止指令')
N1065 ('M77 - M79 指令可使伺服馬達停止.M77 停止馬')
N1066 ('達 1,M78 停止馬達 2,M79 停止馬達 3 ')
N1067 (' ')
N1068 (' ')
N1069 (' ')
N1070 (' ')
N1071 (' M98 呼叫副程式')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 呼叫程式番号 9876 程式,但引数無')
N1073 ('法伝到副程式,用 M99 終止副程式 ')
N1074 (' ')
N1075 (' ')
N1076 ('要注意若是在副程式使用 M02、M30 場合.会無')
N1077 ('法回到原来程式,程式会自動終了. ')
N1078 (' ')
N1079 ('M99 由副程式退回')
N1080 ('程式執行中読到 M99 会返回原呼叫程式,若程')

- 146 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1081 ('式執行没有呼叫副程式的話,会一直重覆執行 ')
N1082 ('此程式. ')
N1083 (' ')
N1084 (' ')
N1085 (' ')
N1168 (' M00 程式停止')
N1169 (' M01 選択停止')
N1170 (' M02 程式終了')
N1171 (' M03 主軸正転')
N1172 (' M04 主軸反転')
N1173 (' M05 主軸停止')
N1174 (' M06 刀具交換')
N1175 (' M07 切削液開')
N1176 (' M08 霧化式切削液開')
N1177 (' M09 切削液関')
N1178 (' M19 主軸定位')
N1179 (' M30 程式終了回到起点')
N1180 (' M48 主軸速度倍率調整有効')
N1181 (' M49 主軸速度倍率調整 100%')
N1182 (' M67 起動馬達 1')
N1183 (' M68 起動馬達 2')
N1184 (' M69 起動馬達 3')
N1185 (' M77 停止馬達 1')
N1186 (' M78 停止馬達 2')
N1187 (' M79 停止馬達 3')
N1188 (' M98 呼叫副程式')
N1189 (' M99 従副程式返回')

D.2.4.8 Sample of Messages in Portuguese


N0971 (' M00 PARADA PROGRAMA ')
N0972 ('M00 fara com que o programa da peca ')
N0973 ('pare a execucao. Para continuar, o ')
N0974 ('operador tera de premir a tecla inicio ')
N0975 ('de ciclo. ')
N0976 (' M01 PARADA OPCIONAL ')
N0977 ('M01 faz com que o programa PECA pare ')
N0978 ('exec. so se funcao PARADA OPCIONAL ')
N0979 ('estiver ATIVA. Trata-se normalmente ')
N0980 ('de botao pressao no painel oper. ')
N0981 ('Se a PARADA opcional for ativada, o')
N0982 ('operador tera de premir o botao inicio ')
N0983 ('ciclo para continuar. ')
N0984 (' M02 FIM DO PROGRAMA ')
N0985 ('M02 fara com que programa da PECA ')
N0986 ('termine a execucao. Apos a execucao de')
N0987 ('um M02, o operador tem premir RESET para')
N0988 ('reiniciar execucao. ')
N0989 (' M03 BUCHA S.HOR. ')
N0990 ('M03 solicita o INICIO da bucha no')

- 147 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N0991 ('sentido horario. A bucha rodara ')


N0992 ('A veloc. programada da bucha. ')
N0993 ('A mudanca vel. e feita com codigo S. ')
N0994 (' M04 BUCHA S.ANTI-HOR. ')
N0995 ('M04 solicita o inicio da bucha no')
N0996 ('sentido anti-horario. A ')
N0997 ('bucha rodara a veloc. programada ')
N0998 ('da bucha. A mudanca de veloc. e ')
N0999 ('feita com codigo S. ')
N1000 (' M05 PARADA DA BUCHA ')
N1001 ('M05 solicita parada da bucha. ')
N1002 (' M06 TROCA DE FERR. ')
N1003 ('M06 solicita uma troca ferr. na ')
N1004 ('maquina. A macro troca de ferr. deve ')
N1005 ('parar bucha e fluido arref. e ')
N1006 ('iniciar acoes necessarias para ')
N1007 ('realizar a troca ferr. ')
N1008 ('No fim da troca de FERR., a ')
N1009 ('bucha permanece desligada. ')
N1010 (' M07 FLUIDO ARREF. LIQUIDO LIG. ')
N1011 ('M07 solicita ligacao fluido arref. ')
N1012 ('liq. na maquina. E um fluxo denso')
N1013 ('de fl. arref. para evitar que ')
N1014 ('a ferr. corte sobreaqueca. ')
N1015 (' M08 FLUIDO ARREF. NEBLINA LIG. ')
N1016 ('M08 solicita lig. fluido arref. ')
N1017 ('neblina na maquina. E um fluxo')
N1018 ('leve de fl. arr. p/usar c/baixas ')
N1019 ('forcas corte ou qdo material dissipa ')
N1020 ('facilmente grande parte calor gerado ')
N1021 ('dte ciclos de corte. ')
N1022 (' M09 FLUIDO ARREF. DESL. ')
N1023 ('M09 desliga o fl. arrefecimento ')
N1024 (' liq. e neblina na maq. Esta funcao ')
N1025 ('e util quando ferr. esta afastada da ')
N1026 ('peca e requer inspecao. ')
N1027 ('M05 E M06 tambem deviam desligar fl. ')
N1028 ('arref., mas tal nao pode ser garantido. ')
N1029 (' M19 PEDIDO DE ORIENT. DA BUCHA ')
N1030 ('M19 solicita a orientacao da bucha ')
N1031 ('de modo a bloquear o veio da bucha numa ')
N1032 ('posicao conhecida. Esta funcao E til ')
N1033 ('dte ciclos troca de ferr. ')
N1034 (' M30 PARADA PROGRAMA E REBOBINAMENTO ')
N1035 ('M30 para a execucao do prog.pca ')
N1036 ('atual e emite um pedido de reset e ')
N1037 ('rebobinamento para o CNC. Este pedido')
N1038 ('e tambem passado ao sw ctrl maq.p. ')
N1039 ('fazer reset cod. M modais. ')
N1040 ('E possivel execucao programa da peca ')
N1041 ('do inicio premindo simplesmente')
N1042 ('ini. ciclo. ')
N1043 (' M48 SUPLANT. VEL. BUCHA PERMITIDA ')
N1044 ('M48 ATIVA a funcao do ')
N1045 ('selector de supl. bucha no ')
- 148 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1046 ('painel operacao. Com este selector, ')
N1047 ('operador pode modificar vel. bucha ')
N1048 ('sem mudar o programa ')
N1049 ('da peca. ')
N1050 (' M49 SUPLAN. VEL. BUCHA NAO PERMITIDA ')
N1051 ('M49 inibe a funcao do ')
N1052 ('seletor de supl. bucha no ')
N1053 ('painel de operacao. Neste modo, o ')
N1054 ('operador nao pode modificar ')
N1055 ('a VELOC. da bucha sem mudar ')
N1056 ('o programa peca. ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 Comandos inicio do motor ')
N1058 ('M67 a M69 sao codigos M fornecidos para ')
N1059 ('ligar um aparelho na maquina. Estes ')
N1060 ('aparelhos podem ser designados como ')
N1061 ('motores. Motor 1 E inic. pela ')
N1062 ('programacao de M67, motor 2 com M68, e ')
N1063 ('motor 3 com M69. ')
N1064 (' M77 - M79 Comandos PARADA do motor ')
N1065 ('M77 a M79 sao codigos M fornecidos para ')
N1066 ('desligar um aparelho na maquina. Estes')
N1067 ('aparelhos podem ser designados como ')
N1068 ('motores. Motor 1 e parado por ')
N1069 ('programacao de M77, motor 2 com M78, e ')
N1070 ('motor 3 com M79. ')
N1071 (' M98 CHAMADA DE SUB-PROGRAMA ')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 CHAMA SUB-PROGRAMA NUM. ')
N1073 ('9876. ARG.NAO PODEM SER PASSADOS PARA O ')
N1074 ('SUB-PROGRAMA. SUB-PROGRAMA CHAMADO DEVE')
N1075 ('TERMINAR COM UM M99. ')
N1076 ('ATENCAO: SE FOREM USADOS M02 OU M30 NO ')
N1077 ('SUB-PROGRAMA, O PROGRAMA NAO REGRESSARA ')
N1078 ('AO PROGRAMA DE CHAMADA E TERMINA. ')
N1079 (' REGRESSO M99 DO SUB-PROGRAMA ')
N1080 ('QDO M99 ENCONTRADO DTE EXEC. PROGRAMA ')
N1081 ('REGRESSARA AO PROGRAMA')
N1082 ('DE CHAMADA. SE PRO. TIVER SIDO EXEC. ')
N1083 ('SEM UM PROGRAMA DE CHAMADA, O PROGRAMA ')
N1084 ('PERFAZ CICLO E REGR. INICIO, SENDO ')
N1085 (' REP. INFINI. ')
N1168 (' M00 PARADA PROGRAMA')
N1169 (' M01 PARADA OPCIONAL')
N1170 (' M02 FIM DO PROGRAMA')
N1171 (' M03 BUCHA S.HOR.')
N1172 (' M04 BUCHA S.ANTI-HOR.')
N1173 (' M05 PARADA DA BUCHA')
N1174 (' M06 TROCA DE FERR.')
N1175 (' M07 FLUIDO ARREF. LIQUIDO')
N1176 (' M08 FLUIDO ARREF. NEBLINA')
N1177 (' M09 FLUIDO ARREF. DESL.')
N1178 (' M19 ORIENT. BUCHA')
N1179 (' M30 PARADA PROGRAMA E REBOBINAMENTO')
N1180 (' M48 SUPLANT. VEL. BUCHA PERMITIDA')
N1181 (' M49 SUPLANT. VEL. BUCHA 100 POR CENTO')
N1182 (' M67 INICIO MOTOR 1')
- 149 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1183 (' M68 INICIO MOTOR 2')


N1184 (' M69 INICIO MOTOR 3')
N1185 (' M77 PARAG. MOTOR 1')
N1186 (' M78 PARAG. MOTOR 2')
N1187 (' M79 PARAG. MOTOR 3')
N1188 (' M98 CHAMADA DE SUB-PROGRAMA')
N1189 (' M99 REGRESSO DO SUB-PROGRAMA')

D.2.4.9 Sample of Messages in Polish


N0971 (' M00 STOP PROGRAMU ')
N0972 ('Funkcja M00 powoduje zatrzymanie ')
N0973 ('wykonywania programu. W celu wznowienia ')
N0974 ('wykonywania, operator musi wcisnac ')
N0975 ('odpowiedni przycisk na panelu. ')
N0976 (' M01 WARUNKOWY STOP PROGRAMU ')
N0977 ('Funkcja M01 powoduje zatrzymanie ')
N0978 ('wykonywania programu jezeli wcisniety ')
N0979 ('jest przycisk ZATRZYMANIA WARUNKOWEGO. ')
N0980 ('Zwykle jest to przycisk na panelu ')
N0981 ('operatora. W celu wznowienia ')
N0982 ('wykonywania, operator musi wcisnac ')
N0983 ('odpowiedni przycisk na panelu. ')
N0984 (' M02 KONIEC PROGRAMU ')
N0985 ('Funkcja M02 powoduje zatrzymanie ')
N0986 ('wykonywania programu. W celu wznowienia ')
N0987 ('wykonywania po zatrzymaniu funkcja M02, ')
N0988 ('operator musi wcisnac przycisk RESET. ')
N0989 (' M03 OBROTY WRZECIONA ZRWZ ')
N0990 ('Funkcja M03 wlacza obroty wrzeciona ')
N0991 ('zgodne z ruchem wskazowek zegara (ZRWZ).')
N0992 ('Wrzeciono pracuje z zaprogramowana za ')
N0993 ('pomoca adresu S predkoscia. ')
N0994 (' M04 OBROTY WRZECIONA PRWZ ')
N0995 ('Funkcja M04 wlacza obroty wrzeciona ')
N0996 ('przeciwne do ruchu wskazowek zegara ')
N0997 ('(PRWZ) Wrzeciono pracuje z zaprogramo- ')
N0998 ('wana za pomoca adresu S predkoscia. ')
N0999 (' ')
N1000 (' M05 ZATRZYMANIE WRZECIONA ')
N1001 ('Funkcja M05 zatrzymuje wrzeciono. ')
N1002 (' M06 ZMIANA NARZEDZIA ')
N1003 ('Funkcja M06 sluzy do zmiany narzedzia ')
N1004 ('obrabiarki. Makro do zmiany narzedzia ')
N1005 ('powinno zatrzymac wrzeciono i chlodziwo,')
N1006 ('a nastepnie zainicjowac dzialania ')
N1007 ('zwiazane ze zmiana narzedzia. Po ')
N1008 ('zakonczeniu zmiany narzedzia, wrzeciono ')
N1009 ('pozostaje nie wlaczone. ')
N1010 (' M07 WLACZENIE CHLODZIWA INTENSYWNEGO ')
N1011 ('Funkcja M07 wlacza chlodziwo. Jest ')
N1012 ('to chlodziwo o duzej intensywnosci, ')
N1013 ('przeznaczone do ochrony narzedzia przed ')
N1014 ('przegrzaniem. ')
N1015 (' M08 WLACZENIE CHLODZIWA NORMALNEGO ')
- 150 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1016 ('Funkcja M08 wlacza chlodziwo. Jest ')
N1017 ('to chlodziwo o malej intensywnosci, ')
N1018 ('wykorzystywane przy malych silach ')
N1019 ('skrawania lub gdy material latwo ')
N1020 ('rozprasza cieplo generowane w czasie ')
N1021 ('obrobki. ')
N1022 (' M09 WYLACZENIE CHLODZIWA ')
N1023 ('Funkcja M09 wylacza chlodziwo (zarowno ')
N1024 ('normalne jak i o duzej intensywnosci). ')
N1025 ('Funkcja ta jest uzyteczna, jezeli narze-')
N1026 ('dzie znajduje sie z dala od detalu i ')
N1027 ('wymaga kontroli. Chlodziwo jest rowniez ')
N1028 ('wylacz. przez M05 i M06, ale nie zawsze.')
N1029 (' M19 ZORIENTOWANE ZATRZYM. WRZECIONA ')
N1030 ('Funkcja M19 zatrzymuje wrzeciono w ')
N1031 ('okreslonej pozycji. Funkcja ta jest ')
N1032 ('wykorzystywana przez cykle wymiany ')
N1033 ('narzedzi. ')
N1034 (' M30 KONIEC PROGRAMU I PRZEWINIECIE ')
N1035 ('Funkcja M30 zatrzymuje wykonywanie ')
N1036 ('programu oraz wysyla polecenie zreseto- ')
N1037 ('wania i przewiniecia do CNC. Polecenie ')
N1038 ('to jest rowniez przesylane do oprogramo-')
N1039 ('wania sterujacego obrabiarka w celu ')
N1040 ('odwolania modalnych funkcji M. W celu ')
N1041 ('uruchomienia programu od poczatku, ')
N1042 ('wcisnac odpowiedni przycisk na panelu. ')
N1043 (' M48 ZEZWOLENIE NA KOREKTE PRED. WRZ. ')
N1044 ('Funkcja M48 pozwala na korzystanie z ')
N1045 ('przelacznika do korekty predkosci ')
N1046 ('wrzeciona. Za pomoca tego przelacznika ')
N1047 ('operator moze zmienic predkosc ')
N1048 ('wrzeciona, bez wprowadzania zmian ')
N1049 ('w samym programie. ')
N1050 (' M49 BEZ KOREKTY PREDKOSCI WRZECIONA ')
N1051 ('Funkcja M49 nie pozwala na korzystanie z')
N1052 ('przelacznika do korekty predkosci ')
N1053 ('wrzeciona. Za pomoca tego przelacznika ')
N1054 ('operator nie moze zmienic predkosci ')
N1055 ('wrzeciona, bez wprowadzania zmian ')
N1056 ('w samym programie. ')
N1057 (' M67-M69 Funkcje uruchamiania silnikow')
N1058 ('Funkcje M67-M69 sluza do uruchamiania ')
N1059 ('urzadzen obrabiarki. Urzadzenia te sa ')
N1060 ('powszechnie nazywane silnikami. Silnik 1')
N1061 ('jest uruchamiany funkcja M67, silnik 2 ')
N1062 ('funkcja M68 a silnik 3 za pomoca ')
N1063 ('funkcji M69. ')
N1064 (' M77-M79 Funkcje zatrzymyw. silnikow ')
N1065 ('Funkcje M77-M79 sluza do zatrzymywania ')
N1066 ('urzadzen obrabiarki. Urzadzenia te sa ')
N1067 ('powszechnie nazywane silnikami. Silnik 1')
N1068 ('jest zatrzymywany funkcja M77, silnik 2 ')
N1069 ('funkcja M78 a silnik 3 za pomoca ')
N1070 ('funkcji M79. ')
- 151 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1071 (' M98 WYWOLANIE PODPROGRAMU ')


N1072 ('M98 P9876 WYWOLUJE PODPROGRAM NR 9876. ')
N1073 ('NIE MOZNA PRZESYLAC PARAMETROW DO POD- ')
N1074 ('PROGRAMU. PODPROGRAM POWINIEN BYC ')
N1075 ('ZAKONCZONY M99. UWAGA: JEZELI WYWOLYWANY')
N1076 ('PODPROGRAM ZAWIERA FUNKCJE M02 LUB M30, ')
N1077 ('NIE NASTAPI ZAKONCZENIE I POWROT DO ')
N1078 ('PROGRAMU WYWOLUJACEGO. ')
N1079 (' M99 POWROT Z PODPROGRAMU ')
N1080 ('PO NAPOTKANIU FUNKCJI M99 NASTEPUJE ')
N1081 ('POWROT Z PODPROGRAMU DO PROGRAMU ')
N1082 ('WYWOLUJACEGO. JEZELI PROGRAM BYL ')
N1083 ('WYKONYWANY BEZ PROGRAMU WYWOLUJACEGO, ')
N1084 ('NASTAPI PRZEJSCIE DO POCZATKU I ')
N1085 ('POWTORZENIE WYKONYWANIA. ')
N1168 (' M00 STOP PROGRAMU')
N1169 (' M01 WARUNKOWY STOP PROGRAMU')
N1170 (' M02 KONIEC PROGRAMU')
N1171 (' M03 OBROTY WRZECIONA ZRWZ')
N1172 (' M04 OBROTY WRZECIONA PRWZ')
N1173 (' M05 ZATRZYMANIE WRZECIONA')
N1174 (' M06 ZMIANA NARZEDZIA')
N1175 (' M07 WLACZENIE CHLODZIWA INTENSYWNEGO')
N1176 (' M08 WLACZENIE CHLODZIWA NORMALNEGO')
N1177 (' M09 WYLACZENIE CHLODZIWA')
N1178 (' M19 ZORIENTOWANE ZATRZYM. WRZECIONA')
N1179 (' M30 KONIEC PROGRAMU I PRZEWINIECIE')
N1180 (' M48 ZEZWOLENIE NA KOREKTE PRED. WRZ.')
N1181 (' M49 BEZ KOREKTY PREDKOSCI WRZECIONA')
N1182 (' M67 URUCHOMIENIE SILNIKA 1')
N1183 (' M68 URUCHOMIENIE SILNIKA 2')
N1184 (' M69 URUCHOMIENIE SILNIKA 3')
N1185 (' M77 ZATRZYMANIE SILNIKA 1')
N1186 (' M78 ZATRZYMANIE SILNIKA 2')
N1187 (' M79 ZATRZYMANIE SILNIKA 3')
N1188 (' M98 WYWOLANIE PODPROGRAMU')
N1189 (' M99 POWROT Z PODPROGRAMU')

D.2.4.10 Sample of Messages in Swedish


N0971 (' M00 PROGRAMSTOPP ')
N0972 ('M00 far delprogrammet att stoppa sitt ')
N0973 ('utforandet. For att fortsatta, ')
N0974 ('ombeds operatoren att trycka ner ')
N0975 ('cykelstarttangenten. ')
N0976 (' M01 MANUELLT STOPP ')
N0977 ('M01 far delprogrammet att stoppa sitt ')
N0978 ('utforande END.OM Manuellt stopp- ')
N0979 ('funktionen ar aktiv. Den utgors ')
N0980 ('ofta av en tryckknapp pa panelen. ')
N0981 ('Om det manuella stoppet ar aktivt ')
N0982 ('ombeds operatoren att trycka ner ')
N0983 ('cykelstartknappen for att fortsatta. ')
N0984 (' M02 PROGRAMSLUT')
N0985 ('M02 far delprogrammet att avsluta ')
- 152 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N0986 ('utforandet. Efter utforandet av ett M02,')
N0987 ('maste operatoren trycka ner RESET ')
N0988 ('for att aterstarta utforandet. ')
N0989 (' M03 SPINDEL-CW ')
N0990 ('M03 requests starting spindeln in the ')
N0991 ('clockwise direction. The spindeln will ')
N0992 ('run at the programmed spindelspeed. ')
N0993 ('Changing speed ar done with an S-code. ')
N0994 (' M04 SPINDEL CCW ')
N0995 ('M04 begar start av spindeln i ')
N0996 ('motsols riktning. Spindeln kors ')
N0997 ('vid programmerad spindelhastighet ')
N0998 ('Andring av hastigheten gors m.en S-kod. ')
N0999 ('gjort med en S-kod. ')
N1000 (' M05 SPINDELSTOPP ')
N1001 ('M05 begar stoppning av spindeln. ')
N1002 (' M06 VERKTYGSBYTE ')
N1003 ('M06 begar verktygsbyte pa ')
N1004 ('maskinen. Verktygsbytesmakrot bor ')
N1005 ('stoppa spindeln & kylmedlet & sedan ')
N1006 ('starta nodvandiga atgarder for att ')
N1007 ('genomfora ett verktygsbyte. ')
N1008 ('Efter verktygsbytet, ')
N1009 ('forblir spindeln avstangd. ')
N1010 (' M07 SPOLKYLMEDEL PA ')
N1011 ('M07 begar paslag av spol- ')
N1012 ('kylmedlet i maskinen. Detta ar en rejal ')
N1013 ('strale kylmedel, som forhindrar att ')
N1014 ('skarverktyget overhettas. ')
N1015 (' M08 DIMKYLMEDEL PA ')
N1016 ('M08 begar paslag av dim- ')
N1017 ('kylmedlet i maskinen. Detta ar en smal ')
N1018 ('strale kylmedel, som anvands nar skar- ')
N1019 ('krafterna ar sma/nar materialet latt ')
N1020 ('avger det mesta av varmen, som uppstar ')
N1021 ('under skarning. ')
N1022 (' M09 KYLMEDEL AV ')
N1023 ('M09 slar av bade spol- & dim- ')
N1024 ('kylmedlet i maskinen. Denna funktion ')
N1025 ('ar nyttig nar verktyget ar borta fran ')
N1026 ('arbetsstycket & behover inspekteras. ')
N1027 ('M05 & M06 bor aven sla av ')
N1028 ('kylmedlet, men detta kan ej garanteras. ')
N1029 (' M19 BEGARAN OM SPINDELORIENTERING')
N1030 ('M19 begar orientering av av spindeln ')
N1031 ('for att lasa spindelaxeln i en ')
N1032 ('kand position. Denna funktion ar nyttig ')
N1033 ('under verktygsbyte-cykler . ')
N1034 (' M30 PROGRAMSTOPP & ATERSPOLN. ')
N1035 ('M30 stoppar utforande av aktuellt ')
N1036 ('delprog. & sander begaran om nollstalln.')
N1037 ('och aterspoln. till CNC:N. Denna begaran')
N1038 ('lamnas ocksa till maskinstyrningen ')
N1039 ('for att nollstalla modala M-koder. ')
N1040 ('Utforande av delprogrammet fran ')
- 153 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1041 ('borjan kan enkelt goras genom att trycka')


N1042 ('Cykel start. ')
N1043 (' M48 SPDL-HASTIGHETSINGREPP TILLATEN ')
N1044 ('M48 aktiverar funktionen hos ')
N1045 ('spindelingreppsvaljaren pa ')
N1046 ('manoverpanelen. Med denna valjare, ')
N1047 ('kan operatoren andra spindel- ')
N1048 ('hastighet utan att andra del- ')
N1049 ('programmet. ')
N1050 (' M49 SPINDELHASTIGHETEN LAST ')
N1051 ('M49 stoppar funktionen hos ')
N1052 ('spindelingreppsvaljaren pa ')
N1053 ('manoverpanelen. I denna mod far ')
N1054 ('operatoren inte andra ')
N1055 ('spindelhastigheten utan andring av ')
N1056 ('delprogrammet. ')
N1057 (' M67-M69 Motorstartkommandon ')
N1058 ('M67-M69 ar M-koder for att ')
N1059 ('sla pa en anordning pa maskinen. Dessa ')
N1060 ('anordningar kan i allmanhet kallas ')
N1061 ('motorer. Motor 1 startas med ')
N1062 ('en programmering av M67, motor 2 med ')
N1063 ('M68, & motor 3 med M69. ')
N1064 (' M77-M79 Motor-stoppkommandon ')
N1065 ('M77-M79 ar M-koder for att ')
N1066 ('sla av en anordning pa maskinen. Dessa ')
N1067 ('anordningar kan i allmanhet kallas ')
N1068 ('motorer. Motor 1 stoppas med ')
N1069 ('en programmering av M77, motor 2 med ')
N1070 ('M78 & motor 3 med M79. ')
N1071 (' M98 UNDERPROGRAMANROP ')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 ANROPA UNDERPROGRAMNUMMER ')
N1073 ('9876. ARGUMENT KAN EJ BE PASSERADE TILL ')
N1074 ('UNDERPROGRAM. ANROPAT. BOR ')
N1075 ('SLUTA MED EN M99. ')
N1076 ('VARNING: OM M02 ELLER M30 ANVANDS I ')
N1077 ('UNDERPROGRAM. DET ATERGAR EJ ')
N1078 ('TILL ANROPSPROGRAM & AVSLUTAS. ')
N1079 (' M99 RETUR FRAN UNDERPROGRAM ')
N1080 ('NAR M99 PATRAFFAS UNDER PROGRAM ')
N1081 ('UTFORANDE, ATERGAR DEN TILL ANROPS- ')
N1082 ('PROGRAMMET. OM PROGRAMMET UTFORDES ')
N1083 ('UTAN ANROPSPROGRAM, LOOPAR PROGRAMMET ')
N1084 ('TILL BORJAN & REPETERAR ')
N1085 ('I OANDLIGHET. ')
N1168 (' M00 PROGRAMSTOPP')
N1169 (' M01 MANUELLT STOPPP')
N1170 (' M02 PROGRAMSLUT')
N1171 (' M03 SPINDEL-CW')
N1172 (' M04 SPINDEL-CCW')
N1173 (' M05 SPINDELSTOPP')
N1174 (' M06 VERKT.BYTE')
N1175 (' M07 SPOLKYLMEDEL')
N1176 (' M08 DIMKYLMEDEL')
N1177 (' M09 KYLMEDEL AV')
- 154 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1178 (' M19 SPINDELORIENT')
N1179 (' M30 PROGRAMSTOPP & REWIND')
N1180 (' M48 SPDL-HAST.INGREPP TILLATET')
N1181 (' M49 SPDL-HAST.INGREPP 100 %')
N1182 (' M67 START MOTOR 1')
N1183 (' M68 START MOTOR 2')
N1184 (' M69 START MOTOR 3')
N1185 (' M77 STOPP MOTOR 1')
N1186 (' M78 STOPP MOTOR 2')
N1187 (' M79 STOPP MOTOR 3')
N1188 (' M98 U-PROGRAMANROP')
N1189 (' M99 RETUR FRAN U-PROGRAM')

D.2.4.11 Sample of Messages in Czech


N0971 (' M00 STOP PROGRAMU ')
N0972 ('M00 zastavi zpracovani programu ')
N0973 ('soucasti. Ma-li program pokracovat, ')
N0974 ('musi operator stisknout tlacitko ')
N0975 ('startu. ')
N0976 (' M01 VOLITELNY STOP ')
N0977 ('M01 zastavi zpracovani programu ')
N0978 ('soucasti, pouze kdyz je aktivni funkce ')
N0979 ('VOLITELNY STOP. Je to zpravidla ')
N0980 ('tlacitko na strojnim panelu. ')
N0981 ('Kdyz je funkce volitelneho stopu')
N0982 ('aktivni, musi operator stisknout tlacit.')
N0983 ('start cyklu, aby program pokracoval. ')
N0984 (' M02 KONEC PROGRAMU ')
N0985 ('M02 ukonci zpracovani ')
N0986 ('programu soucasti. Po vykonani povelu')
N0987 ('M02 musi operator tlacitkem RESET ')
N0988 ('restartovat zpracovani. ')
N0989 (' M03 VRETENO CW')
N0990 ('M03 zapne otaceni vretena po sm. hod.')
N0991 ('rucicek. Vreteno se bude ')
N0992 ('tocit naprogramovanymi otackami. ')
N0993 ('Zmenu otacek lze provest S kodem. ')
N0994 (' M04 VRETENO CCW')
N0995 ('M04 zapne otaceni vretena proti sm. hod.')
N0996 ('rucicek. Vreteno ')
N0997 ('se bude tocit naprogramovanymi ')
N0998 ('otackami. Zmenu otacek lze ')
N0999 ('provest S kodem. ')
N1000 (' M05 STOP VRETENA ')
N1001 ('M05 zastavi otaceni vretena. ')
N1002 (' M06 ZMENA NASTROJE ')
N1003 ('M06 zadava vymenu nastroje v obrabecim')
N1004 ('stroji. Makro pro vymenu nastroje musi')
N1005 ('zastavit vreteno, privod chladiva a')
N1006 ('potom zahajit akce, potrebne pro ')
N1007 ('vymenu nastroje. ')
N1008 ('Po ukonceni vymeny nastroje ')
N1009 ('zustane vreteno zastavene. ')
N1010 (' M07 PROUD CHLADIVA ZAP. ')
- 155 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D. CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER APPENDIX B-64434EN/02

N1011 ('M07 zapina chlazeni nastroje ')


N1012 ('proudem chladiva. Jedna se o')
N1013 ('silny proud chladiva, zamezujici ')
N1014 ('prehrati rezneho nastroje. ')
N1015 (' M08 CHLAZENI MLHOU ZAP. ')
N1016 ('M08 zapina chlazeni nastroje ')
N1017 ('mlhou chladiva. Jedna se o')
N1018 ('chlazeni malym mnozstvim chladiva, ')
N1019 ('kdyz je zatizeni nastroje nizke a ')
N1020 ('material snadno pohlti nadmerne teplo ')
N1021 ('vznikajici pri obrabeni. ')
N1022 (' M09 CHLAZENI VYP. ')
N1023 ('M09 Vypina na stroji proud a ')
N1024 ('mlhu chladiva. Tuto funkci je ')
N1025 ('vhodne pouzit, kdyz je nastroj odtazen')
N1026 ('od soucasti a vyzaduje kontrolu. ')
N1027 ('Povely M05 a M06 by take mely vypnout ')
N1028 ('chlazeni, avsak nelze to zarucit. ')
N1029 (' M19 POZADAVEK ORIENTACE VRETENA ')
N1030 ('M19 provadi orientovani vretena, ')
N1031 ('aby byla hridel vretena blokovana ve ')
N1032 ('zname poloze. Tuto funkci je vhodne ')
N1033 ('pouzit ''behem zmeny cyklu. ')
N1034 (' M30 STOP A PREVINUTI PROGRAMU ')
N1035 ('M30 zastavi zpracovani aktualniho ')
N1036 ('programu soucasti a vysle do CNC systemu')
N1037 ('pozadavek resetu a previnuti. Pozadavek')
N1038 ('je take predan ridicimu softwaru stroje ')
N1039 ('pro reset modalnich M kodu. ')
N1040 ('Zpracovani programu soucasti od ')
N1041 ('zacatku je mozne pouhym stisknutim')
N1042 ('tlacitka pro start cyklu. ')
N1043 (' M48 POVOLIT DODAT. ZMENU OTACEK VRET.')
N1044 ('M48 Aktivuje funkci volice dodatecne ')
N1045 ('zmeny otacek vretena na ')
N1046 ('strojnim panelu. Timto volicem muze ')
N1047 ('operator zmenit otacky vretena ')
N1048 ('bez upravy programu soucasti. ')
N1049 (' ')
N1050 (' M49 ZAKAZAT DODAT.ZMENU OTACEK VRET.')
N1051 ('M49 Deaktivuje funkci volice dodatecne')
N1052 ('zmeny otacek vretena na ')
N1053 ('strojnim panelu. V tomto rezimu ')
N1054 ('operator nesmi menit otacky vretena ')
N1055 ('bez upravy programu soucasti. ')
N1056 (' ')
N1057 (' M67 - M69 Povely pro spusteni motoru ')
N1058 ('M67 az M69 jsou M kody, ktere slouzi ')
N1059 ('k zapnuti ruznych zarizeni obrab.stroje.')
N1060 ('Temito zarizenimi jsou vetsinou motory.')
N1061 (' Motor 1 se spousti ')
N1062 ('povelem M67, motor 2 povelem M68 a ')
N1063 ('motor 3 povelem M69. ')
N1064 (' M77 - M79 Povely pro vypnuti motoru ')
N1065 ('M77 az M79 jsou M kody, ktere slouzi ')
- 156 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

D.CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL
GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINE
B-64434EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL BUILDER
N1066 ('k vypnuti ruznych zarizeni obrab.stroje.')
N1067 ('Temito zarizenimi jsou vetsinou motory.')
N1068 (' Motor 1 se vypne ')
N1069 ('povelem M77, motor 2 povelem M78 a ')
N1070 ('motor 3 povelem M79. ')
N1071 (' M98 VOLANI PODPROGRAMU ')
N1072 ('M98 P9876 ZAVOLA PODPROGRAM CISLO ')
N1073 ('9876. PODPROGRAMU NELZE PREDAVAT ')
N1074 ('ARGUMENTY. VOLANY PODPROGRAM MUSI BYT')
N1075 ('UKONCEN POVELEM M99. ')
N1076 ('POZOR: KDYZ JE V PODPROGRAMU POUZIT ')
N1077 ('KOD M02 NEBO M30, PODPROGRAM SE NEVRATI ')
N1078 ('DO VOLAJICIHO PROGRAMU A SKONCI. ')
N1079 (' M99 NAVRAT Z PODPROGRAMU ')
N1080 ('KDYZ JE BEHEM ZPRAC. PROGRAMU ZJISTEN')
N1081 ('KOD M99, PROVEDE SE NAVRAT DO VOLAJICIHO')
N1082 ('PROGRAMU. POKUD BYL PROG. ZPRACOVAN BEZ')
N1083 ('VOLANI Z JINEHO PROGRAMU, ZACNE SE ')
N1084 ('ZPRACOVAVAT OD ZACATKU V NEURCITE ')
N1085 ('SMYCCE. ')
N1168 (' M00 STOP PROGRAMU')
N1169 (' M01 VOLITELNE ZASTAVENI')
N1170 (' M02 KONEC PROGRAMU')
N1171 (' M03 VRETENO CW')
N1172 (' M04 VRETENO CCW')
N1173 (' M05 STOP VRETENA')
N1174 (' M06 VYMENA NASTROJE')
N1175 (' M07 PLNE CHLAZENI')
N1176 (' M08 CHLAZENI MLHOU')
N1177 (' M09 VYP. CHLAZENI')
N1178 (' M19 ORIENTOVAT VRETENO')
N1179 (' M30 STOP A PREVINUTI PROGRAMU')
N1180 (' M48 POVOLIT DODAT. ZMENU OTACEK VRET')
N1181 (' M49 100 PROC. DODAT. ZM. OTACEK VRET.')
N1182 (' M67 SPUSTIT MOTOR 1')
N1183 (' M68 SPUSTIT MOTOR 2')
N1184 (' M69 SPUSTIT MOTOR 3')
N1185 (' M77 VYPNOUT MOTOR 1')
N1186 (' M78 VYPNOUT MOTOR 2')
N1187 (' M79 VYPNOUT MOTOR 3')
N1188 (' M98 VOLANI PODPROGRAMU')
N1189 (' M99 NAVRAT Z PODPROGRAMU')

- 157 -
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

Addition to FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Common to Lathe System / Machining Center System
OPERATOR'S MANUAL

1. Type of applied technical documents

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Spec. No./Ed. B-64434EN/02

2. Summary of Change

New, Add,
Applicable
Group Name/Outline Correct,
Date
Delete
Basic
Function The new functions are added to Chapter VI. Add Immediately

Optional
Function
Unit

Maintenance
Parts
Notice

Correction

Another

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL

01 2012.09.07 Newly Designed Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 1/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

VI. SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

1. C-axis drilling cycle……………….……………………………………………………………… 3


2. C-axis grooving cycle……………………………………………………………………………… 15
3. Residual machining cycle…………..………………………….………………………………… 23
4. Pocketing cycle with island………………….………………………………………………….. 27

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 2/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

1 C-axis drilling cycle


Using this function enables a hole machining by positioning in C-axis.

NOTE
1 8.4”color LCD is necessary to use this function.
2 This function is enabled when the parameter No.9302#0 is set to 1.

1.1 OPERATING METHOD


Press the soft key [C-AXIS] on the main menu screen.

(Example of operating procedure)

(1) When C-axis machining is selected, the machining menu screen shown below is displayed.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 3/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

(2) Select the desired machining type with the corresponding soft key. The data input screen of the
selected machining type block (when C-axis drilling is selected) as shown below appears. For
details on the input items of each machining type block, see the next section. To cancel insertion,
press the leftmost soft key.

(3) When the necessary data is entered and soft key [FIGURE] is pressed, a figure menu screen as
shown below appears. Only the menu of figures that can be used in the machining type block
entered immediately before is displayed. The machining type block entered here is added to the
machining program.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 4/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

(4) When a figure is selected with the corresponding soft key, a data input screen as shown below
appears (HOLE PATTERN - ENDFACE is selected in the following figure). For details on the
input item of each figure block, see the next section.

(5) When the necessary data has been entered, press soft key [NEXT F] or [END]. When [END] is
pressed, the entered figure block is added to the machining program and the main menu is
displayed.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 5/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

1.2 INPUT ITEM

1.2.1 Machining Type Block


C-axis drilling: G1111

Data item Comment


W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Drilling without dwell
2 : Drilling with dwell
3 : High speed peck drilling or Peck drilling
C CLEARANCE Distance from the surface of workpiece to the start point of
actual cutting motion (radius)
I REFERENCE POSITION 1 : Return to initial point at moving to the next hole position
RETURN 2 : Return to R point (start point of actual cutting motion) at
moving to the next hole position
F FEED RATE Cutting federate
Q CUTTING DEPTH Cutting in depth of one cutting motion (radius)
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec

NOTE
1 High speed peck drilling and peck drilling of MACHINING TYPE can be switched by the
parameter No.5101#2.
2 The system refers to the parameter No.5114 for the return amount. Therefore, please
set parameter No.5114 to the suitable value before machining.

C-axis tapping: G1112

Data item Comment


W MACHINING TYPE 1 : Normal tapping
2 : Reverse tapping
3 : Rigid tapping
4 : Reverse rigid tapping
C CLEARANCE Distance from the surface of workpiece to the start point of
actual cutting motion (radius)
I REFERENCE POSITION 1 : Return to initial point at moving to the next hole position
RETURN 2 : Return to R point (start point of actual cutting motion) at
moving to the next hole position
P DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of hole, in unit of msec
L THREADING LEAD Lead of a tapping thread
S SPINDLE SPEED Spindle rotating speed (min-1)

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 6/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

NOTE
1 If MACHING TYPE is normal tapping or reverse tapping, it is not necessary to enter the
SPINDLE SPEED. If the SPINDLE SPEED data is input, it will be neglected.
2 When you use rigid tapping mode M code command (bit 0 (G84) of parameter No.5200
= 0), the system refers to No.5210 for the value of M code. Therefore, please set
No.5210 to suitable value before machining.

1.2.2 Figure Block

Endface – Hole pattern: G1572

Data item Comment


B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L BOTTOM –Z Hole depth (usually negative value)
X X AXIS POSITION (RADIUS) X coordinate of a hole position
A START ANGLE Center angle of the 1st hole point
C PITCH ANGLE Center angle between 2 holes point
M NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes

Cylinder – Hole pattern: G1572

Data item Comment


B REFERENCE POSITION X-coordinate of the workpiece surface (radius)
(RADIUS)
L BOTTOM –X (RADIUS) Hole depth (radius, usually negative value)
Z Z AXIS POSITION Z coordinate of a hole position
A START ANGLE Center angle of the 1st hole point
C PITCH ANGLE Center angle between 2 holes point
M NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 7/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

1.3 PARAMETERS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101 RTR

RTR = 0 : G83 and G87 specify a high-speed peck drilling cycle.


= 1 : G83 and G87 Specify a peck drilling cycle.

5110 CLAMP M

CLAMP M This parameter sets an M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle.
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999998
[Unit of data] 1

5114

This parameter sets the return value in high-speed peck drilling cycle.
[Valid data range] -999999.999 to +99999999 / -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
[Unit of data] mm / inch

G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 0)

q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
q
d

q
d

Z point

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 8/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

5115

This parameter sets a clearance value in a peck drilling cycle.


[Valid data range] -999999.999 to +99999999 / -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
[Unit of data] mm / inch

G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 1)

q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
q
d

q
d

Z point

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5200 G84

G84 = 0 : Method for specifying rigid tapping: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is
specified prior to the issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No.5210).
= 1 : Method for specifying rigid tapping: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is
not used. (G84 cannot be used as a G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be used
for the reverse tapping cycle.)

5210 TAP MODE M-CODE

TAP MODE M-CODE This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.
The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when 0 is set.
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
[Unit of data] 1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9302 CAX

CAX = 0 : Disables the C-axis drilling.


= 1 : Enables the C-axis drilling.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 9/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

27005 CLMPM

CLMPM M code for C-axis clamping.


When this parameter is set to 0, nothing is output.
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Unit of data] 1

NOTE
When M code for C-axis clamping is output, it is necessary to set this parameter to
the following values.
No.27005 is set to value of No.5110.

27006 UCLMPM

UCLMPM M code for C-axis unclamping.


When this parameter is set to 0, nothing is output.
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Unit of data] 1

NOTE
When M code for C-axis unclamping is output, it is necessary to set this parameter to
the following values.
No.27005 is set to value of No.5110 + 1.

27208 MILTMN

MILTMN M code to be specified before tapping by the rotating tool.


Nothing is output when 0 is set.
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
[Unit of data] 1

27209 MILTMR

MILTMN M code to be specified before reverse tapping by the rotating tool.


Nothing is output when 0 is set.
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
[Unit of data] 1

27210 MLNMLM

MLNMLM M code for turning the rotating tool in the normal direction.
M3 is output when 0 is set.
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
[Unit of data] 1

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 10/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

1.4 ALARMS
The following alarms might occur when this cycle is executed.

Alarm
Description
No.
Message NO MACHINING CYCLE BLOCK
No machining cycle is found. No machining type block is found; only a figure
3050 Cause
block is specified.
Modify the machining program by, for example, adding the necessary machining
Action
type block.
Message WRONG G-CODE
3051 Cause No machining cycle is found. An unavailable machining cycle is specified.
Action Necessary options may not be added. Contact the machine tool builder.
Message NO NECESSARY ADDRESS
With a cycle machining command or other 4-digit G commands, necessary
3054 Cause
arguments are not entered.
Action Modify the machining program by, for example, adding necessary arguments.
Message WRONG PARAMETER SETTING
3055 Cause The parameter setting is invalid.
Action Check the parameter setting.
Message WRONG MACHINING TYPE
3056 Cause The machining type specification is invalid.
Action Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate machining type.
Message WRONG REF. POSITION RETURN
Cause The reference position return is invalid.
3057
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate reference position
Action
return.
Message WRONG DWELL TIME
Cause The dwell time specification is invalid.
3058
For example, a negative value may be entered as the dwell time. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate dwell time.
Message WRONG THREADING LEAD
Cause The thread lead specification is invalid.
3059
For example, a negative value may be entered as the thread lead. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate thread lead.
Message WRONG CLEARANCE
Cause The clearance is invalid.
3060
A value not specifiable as a clearance is entered, such as a negative value.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate clearance.
Message WRONG FEED RATE
Cause The feedrate is invalid.
3061
A value not specifiable as a feedrate is entered, such as zero. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate feedrate.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 11/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

Alarm
Description
No.
Message WRONG CUTTING DEP. SETTEING
Cause The cutting depth is invalid.
3062
A value not specifiable as turning and grooving or other cutting depths is
Action
entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG SPINDLE SPEED
Cause The spindle speed is invalid.
3063
A value not specifiable as the spindle speed, for example 0, is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate spindle speed.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G0,1,2,3
3064 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G00, G01, G02 or G03 before the cycle is executed.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G80.
3065 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G80 before the cycle is executed.
Message WRONG STANDARD POSITION
Cause The reference position is invalid.
3066
A value not specifiable as the reference position of a figure block is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG HEIGHT/DEPTH
Cause The height/depth is invalid
3067
A value not specifiable as the height/depth of a figure block is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG FIGURE ANGLE
Cause The figure angle specification is invalid.
3068
A value not specifiable as the angle of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG HOLE/GROOVE NUMBER
Cause The number of holes/grooves specification is invalid.
3069
A value not specifiable as the number of holes or grooves in a figure block is
Action
entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG COORDINATE POSITION
Cause The coordinate specification is invalid.
3070
A value not specifiable as a coordinate of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G40.
3071 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G40 before the cycle is executed.
Message NO M-CODE BEFORE TAP CYCL
In reverse tapping cycle, parameters for M code to be specified before reverse
3072 Cause
tapping are not set.
Action Set the parameters No.27209 for M code to be specified before reverse tapping.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 12/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

1.5 LADDER PROGRAM CREATION


To perform reverse tap cycles, a ladder program needs to be created.
In a reverse tap cycle, the M code for reporting reverse rotation is output as shown below. Reverse
rotation of the spindle is performed by use of the M code under control of the PMC.

Pre-reverse-tapping M code command (Output during float tapping)

Forward spindle rotation M code (Output during float tapping)

Actually, rotating on the


PMC side in the direction
Move to the drilling position opposite to the specified
direction

Move to the approach point (R point)

(Pre-reverse-tapping M code command) (Output during rigid tapping)

(Rigid tapping M, S output) (Output during rigid tapping)

Tapping (G84/88 command)


<1> Forward spindle rotation (during rigid)
<2> Reverse spindle rotation at hole bottom Actually, rotating
<3> Forward spindle rotation after returning to the R on the PMC side in
point (stopping during rigid) the direction
opposite to the
specified direction
(Move to the next drilling position and perform drilling)

Drilling complete (G80)

NOTE
The values of the pre-reverse-tapping M code and forward spindle rotation M code are
the values of parameters No. 27208 to 27210.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 13/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

In lathe tap cycle G84, the forward spindle command at the hole bottom always outputs M04 in both
forward tapping and reverse tapping. Similarly, when the tool returns to the R point, M03 is output. (In
rigid tapping, M03 is output after moving to the R point, M05 is output at the hole bottom, and M05 is
output after returning to the R point).
As shown above, the same M code is output from the NC in both forward tapping and reverse tapping,
so reverse the actual spindle rotation command on the PMC side in the case of reverse tapping.

On the PMC side, when the above M code receives, it is necessary to provide a signal for reversing the
subsequent spindle rotation commands and reverse the spindle rotation commands by detecting the
signal. The new signal needs to be canceled by processing, for example, at the trailing edge of the TAP
signal (TAP <F0002#5>), to be added to the PMC ladder. The ladder sequence is shown below.
(REV_new is a temporary signal for reversing the spindle rotation.)

Timing chart

Mmm1: F10 - F13


Pre-reverse-tapping M
code
(CNC → PMC)

REV_new
(Temporary signal)

TAP: F01#5
(CNC → PMC)
Point R

Mmm2: F10 - F13


Forward spindle M code
(CNC → PMC) Hole bottom

M04: F10 – F13


(CNC → PMC)
Hole bottom Point R

M05: F10 – F13


(CNC → PMC)

Reverse spindle rotation


(PMC → MT)

Forward spindle rotation


(PMC → MT)

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 14/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

2 C-axis grooving cycle


Using this function enables a groove machining by positioning in C-axis.

NOTE
1 8.4”color LCD is necessary to use this function.
2 This function is enabled when the parameter No.9302#0 is set to 1.

2.1 OPERATING METHOD


Press the soft key [C-AXIS] on the main menu screen.

(Example of operating procedure)

(1) When C-axis machining is selected, the machining menu screen shown below is displayed.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 15/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

(2) Select the desired machining type with the corresponding soft key. The data input screen of the
selected machining type block (when C-axis groove is selected) as shown below appears. For
details on the input items of each machining type block, see the next section. To cancel insertion,
press the leftmost soft key.

(3) When the necessary data is entered and soft key [FIGURE] is pressed, a figure menu screen as
shown below appears. Only the menu of figures that can be used in the machining type block
entered immediately before is displayed. The machining type block entered here is added to the
machining program.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 16/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

(4) When a figure is selected with the corresponding soft key, an data input screen as shown below
appears (ENDFACE C-AXIS GROOVE is selected in the following figure). For details on the
input item of each figure block, see the next section.

(5) When the necessary data has been entered, press soft key [NEXT F] or [END]. When [END] is
pressed, the entered figure block is added to the machining program and the main menu is
displayed.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 17/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

2.2 INPUT ITEM

2.2.1 Machining Type Block


C-axis grooving: G1056

Data item Comment


J CUT DEPTH OF TOOL-AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation.
If omitted or input 0, one cutting operation is used. (radius)
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the approaching
point (radius)
F FEED RATE OF Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the side
TOOL-RADIUS face direction of the end mill
E FEED RATE OF TOOL-AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool
axis direction toward the bottom of a side face being
machined

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 18/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

2.2.2 Figure Block

Endface c-axis groove: G1570

Data item Comment


B REFERENCE POSITION Z-coordinate of the workpiece surface
L GROOVE DEPTH Distance from workpiece surface to the bottom of
pocket. (usually negative value)
X X AXIS POSITION (RADIUS) X-coordinate of the center line of a groove (radius)
Q GROOVE ANGLE (SIZE) Center angle formed by the start point (tool center) and end
point (tool center) of a groove
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point (tool center) of the first
groove
C PITCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points (tool centers) of two
adjacent grooves
M NUMBER OF GROOVE Number of grooves to be cut

Cylinder z-axis groove: G1671

Data item Comment


B REFERENCE POSITION X-coordinate of the workpiece surface (radius)
(RADIUS)
L GROOVE DEPTH Distance from workpiece surface to the bottom of
pocket. (radius, usually negative value)
Z Z AXIS POSITION Z-coordinate of the start point of a groove
P GROOVE LENGTH Distance between the start point (tool center) and end point
(tool center) of a groove
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point (tool center) of the first
groove
C PITCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points (tool centers) of two
adjacent grooves
M NUMBER OF GROOVE Center angle formed by the start points (tool centers) of two
adjacent grooves

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 19/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

2.3 PARAMETERS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9302 CAX

CAX = 0 : Disables the C-axis drilling.


= 1 : Enables the C-axis drilling.

27005 CLMPM

CLMPM M code for C-axis clamping.


When this parameter is set to 0, nothing is output.
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Unit of data] 1

27006 UCLMPM

UCLMPM M code for C-axis unclamping.


When this parameter is set to 0, nothing is output.
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Unit of data] 1

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 20/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

2.4 ALARMS
The following alarms might occur when this cycle is executed.

Alarm
Description
No.
Message NO MACHINING CYCLE BLOCK
No machining cycle is found. No machining type block is found; only a figure
3050 Cause
block is specified.
Modify the machining program by, for example, adding the necessary machining
Action
type block.
Message WRONG G-CODE
3051 Cause No machining cycle is found. An unavailable machining cycle is specified.
Action Necessary options may not be added. Contact the machine tool builder.
Message NO NECESSARY ADDRESS
With a cycle machining command or other 4-digit G commands, necessary
3054 Cause
arguments are not entered.
Action Modify the machining program by, for example, adding necessary arguments.
Message WRONG PARAMETER SETTING
3055 Cause The parameter setting is invalid.
Action Check the parameter setting.
Message WRONG CLEARANCE
Cause The clearance is invalid.
3060
A value not specifiable as a clearance is entered, such as a negative value.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate clearance.
Message WRONG FEED RATE
Cause The feedrate is invalid.
3061
A value not specifiable as a feedrate is entered, such as zero. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate feedrate.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G0,1,2,3
3064 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G00, G01, G02 or G03 before the cycle is executed.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G80.
3065 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G80 before the cycle is executed.
Message WRONG STANDARD POSITION
Cause The reference position is invalid.
3066
A value not specifiable as the reference position of a figure block is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG HEIGHT/DEPTH
Cause The height/depth is invalid
3067
A value not specifiable as the height/depth of a figure block is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 21/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

Alarm
Description
No.
Message WRONG FIGURE ANGLE
Cause The figure angle specification is invalid.
3068
A value not specifiable as the angle of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG HOLE/GROOVE NUMBER
Cause The number of holes/grooves specification is invalid.
3069
A value not specifiable as the number of holes or grooves in a figure block is
Action
entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG COORDINATE POSITION
Cause The coordinate specification is invalid.
3070
A value not specifiable as a coordinate of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G40.
3071 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G40 before the cycle is executed.
Message WRONG CUTTING AREA
Cause The machining area is invalid.
3074
Modify the machining program to specify a correct machining area, such as a
Action
part figure and a blank figure in a machining profile.
Message WRONG CUTTING CONDITION
Cause The cutting conditions are invalid.
3075
Modify the machining program to specify normal cutting conditions such as the
Action
feedrate.
Message WRONG CUTTING DEPTH
Cause The depth of cut is invalid.
3076
A value not specifiable as a depth of cut is entered, such as a negative value.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate depth of cut.
Message WRONG FIGURE LENGTH
Cause The figure length is invalid.
3077
A value not specifiable as the length of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message WRONG PITCH SETING
Cause The pitch specification is invalid.
3078
A value not specifiable as the pitch angle of a figure block is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 22/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

3 Residual Machining cycle


This cycle can machine residual area in a corner after pocket machining and so on.

Residual area

3.1 Format of G code


( Format of G code )
G1029 Hh Vv Pp Rr Ii Jj Bb Dd Ww Kk Ll Qq Xx Cc Ff Ee;

( Argument of G code )
Addres Meaning Valid range
s
REFERENCE POSITION OF
H
CORNER X Metric: -99999.999 - 99999.999
REFERENCE POSITION OF Inch : -9999.9999 - 9999.9999
V
CORNER Y
1 : Lower left, 2 : Upper left,
P CORNER DIRECTION
3 : Lower right, 4 : Upper right
R CORNER R
Metric: 0 - 99999.999
I CUTTING WIDTH X-AXIS
Inch : 0 - 9999.9999
J CUTTING WIDTH Y-AXIS
Metric: -99999.999 - 99999.999
B HEIGHT OF CUTTING SURFACE Z
Inch : -9999.9999 - 9999.9999
Metric: 0 - 99999.999
D TOOL DIAMETER
Inch : 0 - 9999.9999
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT 1 : Down cutting, 2 : Up cutting
K SIDE FINISH AMOUNT
L BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT
Metric: 0 - 99999.999
Q APPROACH DISTANCE
Inch : 0 - 9999.9999
X ESCAPE DISTANCE
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Metric: 1.00 - 240000
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Inch : 1.00 - 9600

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 23/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

3.2 The operation to create Residual Machining


The residual machining cycle is created by the following operation.

(1) Select POCKET machining on the main menu screen and the machining cycle menu screen is
shown.
(2) Select residual machining cycle menu on the second page and the data input screen for residual
machining cycle is displayed.
(3) Input necessary data and press soft key [NEXT F] or [END].
When [END] is pressed, G code for residual machining cycle is inserted to a program.

Input items Note


H REFERENCE POSITION OF CORNER X Reference position of corner ( X axis )
V REFERENCE POSITION OF CORNER Y Reference position of corner ( Y axis )
P CORNER DIRECTION A direction there is a corner
R CORNER R Radius of corner
I CUTTING WIDTH X-AXIS Cutting width in a corner ( X axis )
J CUTTING WIDTH Y-AXIS Cutting width in a corner ( Y axis )
B HEIGHT OF CUTTING SURFACE Z The height of the cutting surface ( Z axis )
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
1 : Down cutting
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT
2 : Up cutting
K SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount of the side wall part
L BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT Finishing amount of the bottom part
Q APPROACH DISTANCE Approach distance in the tool radius direction
X ESCAPE DISTANCE Escape distance in the tool radius direction
C CLEARANCE OF TOOL-AXIS Distance from the surface of workpiece to the
approaching point in the tool axis direction ( Z axis )
F FEEDARATE OF TOOL-RADIUS Cutting feedrate in the tool radius direction
E FEEDARATE OF TOOL-AXIS Cutting feedrate in the tool axis direction (Z axis)

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 24/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

3.3 Tool path of Residual Machining cycle


The following tool path is created by execution of residual machining cycle.

CUTTING
WIDTH

REFERENCE CUTTING
POSITION OF WIDTH
CORNER

(1) The tool approaches to the approach point.


(2) The tool moves to the height of the cutting surface.
(3) The residual area in the corner is machined.
(4) The tool escapes by escape distance.
(5) The tool returns in Z axis direction to the position before the start of the machining cycle.

3.4 Condition to be used


It can be used for only 8.4” display.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 25/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

3.5 Alarms
The following alarms might occur when this cycle is executed.

Alarm No. Description


Message INPUT VALUE IS ERRONEOUS.
3001 Cause Necessary data is not entered. Or entered data is invalid.
Display input data screen of the block data, at which the alarm occurred,
Action
and enter the correct data after confirming it.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G17.
3028 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G17 before the cycle is executed.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G90.
3029 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G90 before the cycle is executed.
Message WRONG TOOL DIAMETER
Cause The tool diameter is invalid.
3059 A value not specifiable as a tool diameter is entered, such as a negative
Action value.
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate tool diameter.
Message WRONG CLEARANCE
Cause The clearance is invalid.
3062
A value not specifiable as a clearance is entered, such as a negative value.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate clearance.
Message WRONG FINISHING ALLOWANCE
Cause The finishing allowance is invalid.
3063 A value not specifiable as a finishing allowance is entered, such as a
Action negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate
finishing allowance.
Message WRONG FEEDRATE
Cause The feedrate is invalid.
3064
A value not specifiable as a feedrate is entered, such as zero.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate feedrate.
Message WRONG CORNER SETTING
Cause The corner rounding is invalid.
3070
A value not specifiable as the corner rounding is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G40.
3071 Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
Action Command G40 before the cycle is executed.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 26/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4 Pocket machining cycle with islands


Pocket machining cycle with islands is available by this function.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 27/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.1 Format of program

4.1.1 Format of the program of Pocket machining cycle with


islands
Pocket machining cycle with islands is made from the machining condition block and figure blocks.
And, figure blocks is made from pocket figure block and island figure block.

(Format of the program of pocket machining cycle with islands)

G1049 Dd Tt Ll Jj Kk Hh Ff Ee Ww Bb Cc ; Machining condition block

G1990 ; Figure block start


G1200 T3 Hh Vv Bb Ll Pp Qq Uu Ww Bb Ll Rr ;
~ Pocket figure block
G1206 ;
Figure block
G1200 T2 Hh Vv Bb Ll Pp Qq Uu Ww Bb Ll Rr ;
~ Island figure block
G1206 ;
G1991 ; Figure block end

* 16 islands can be defined .


* Pocket figure block and island figure block are made from G1200~G1206.
Please refer to the next paragraph for details.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 28/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.1.2 Machining condition block


G1049 : Command of machining condition

Data item Description


D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter.
Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face machining. The blank is
T BOTTOM THICKNESS
regarded as 0. (radius value, positive value)
Depth of cut on the side face (tool radius direction) per cutting
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS operation
(radius value, positive value)
Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation
J CUT DEPTH OF AXIS
(radius value, positive value)
Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is regarded as 0.
K SIDE FINISH AMOUNT
(radius value, positive value)
Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face machining. The blank
H BOTTOM FINISHI AMT is
regarded as 0. (radius value, positive value)
F FEED RATE- SING.CUT Feedrate applicable when an end mill is used for cutting.
Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool axis
E FEED RATE- AXIS direction
toward the bottom of a side face being machined
Performs machining in up-cut/down-cut mode, assuming that the
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT tool is rotating clockwise.
1:up-cut, 2:down-cut
Distance between the wall of a pocket and a tool retract position in
CLEARANCE OF
B the
RADIUS
tool radius direction (radius value, positive value)
Distance between the surface of a blank being machined and a
cutting
C CLEARANCE OF AXIS
start point (point R) in the tool axis direction (radius value, positive
value)

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 29/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.1.3 Figure block

4.1.3.1 Pocket figure block


G1200 : Command of pocket figure start

Data item Description


P CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the pocket
Q CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the pocket
LENGTH ALONG TO Length of square side along X-axis
U
THE X-AXIS
W LENGTH ALONG TO Length of square side along Y-axis
W
THE Y-AXIS
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Height / depth of pocket
R R CORNER RADIUS Radius of each corner of the square. The blank is regarded as 0.
T FIGURE TYPE Type of figure (T3 = pocket)
H START POINT X X coordinate of the start point of the pocket figure
V START POINT Y Y coordinate of the start point of the pocket figure

G1201 : Command of pocket figure straight line

Data item Description


H END POINT (X-AXIS) X coordinate of the end point of the line
V END POINT (Y-AXIS) Y coordinate of the end point of the line

G1202,G1203 : Command of pocket figure arc

Data item Description


H END POINT (X-AXIS) X coordinate of the end point of the arc
V END POINT (Y-AXIS) Y coordinate of the end point of the arc
R ARC RADIUS Arc radius of the pocket figure
I CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the arc of the pocket
J CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the arc of the pocket

G1206 : Command of pocket figure end

Note
Please do not delete or change the block and data in the program editor of NC.
The operation by this cycle cannot be supported when the block is deleted or changed in
the program editor of NC.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 30/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.1.3.2 Island figure block


G1200 : Command of island figure start

Data item Description


P CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the island
Q CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the island
LENGTH ALONG TO Length of square side along X-axis
U
THE X-AXIS
W LENGTH ALONG TO Length of square side along Y-axis
W
THE Y-AXIS
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Height / depth of island
R R CORNER RADIUS Radius of each corner of the square. The blank is regarded as 0.
T FIGURE TYPE Type of figure (T2 = island)
H START POINT X X coordinate of the start point of the island figure
V START POINT Y Y coordinate of the start point of the island figure

G1201 : Command of island figure straight line

Data item Description


H END POINT (X-AXIS) X coordinate of the end point of the line
V END POINT (Y-AXIS) Y coordinate of the end point of the line

G1202,G1203 : Command of island figure arc

Data item Description


H END POINT (X-AXIS) X coordinate of the end point of the arc
V END POINT (Y-AXIS) Y coordinate of the end point of the arc
R ARC RADIUS Arc radius of the island figure
I CENTER POINT (X-AXIS) Center point X-coordinate of the arc of the island
J CENTER POINT (Y-AXIS) Center point Y-coordinate of the arc of the island

G1206 : Command of island figure end

Note
Please do not delete or change the block and data in the program editor of NC.
The operation by this cycle cannot be supported when the block is deleted or changed in
the program editor of NC.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 31/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.2 Method for creation of program

4.2.1 New creation of program


<1> On the main menu screen, press the soft key [POCKET].
<2> On the cycle menu screen, change a page by mdi key [↓PAGE]/[↑PAGE], then, press the [6]
soft key. ( Select the “6 G1049 Island Pocketing” on the screen.)
<3> Input the items on the following data input screen of the machining condition block.
G1049 ISLAND POCKETING

T=
J=
H=
K=
F=
E=
D=
L=

EDIT 09:07:49

FIGURE

[FIGURE] soft key : Machining condition block is inserted to the program, and data input
screen of the pocket figure block is displayed.
Left [ ] soft key : Inserting machining condition block is canceled.

<4> Input the items on the following data input screen of pocket figure block.
POCKET FIGURE

H=
V=
U=
W=
B=
L=
R=

EDIT 09:07:49

ISLAND

[ISLAND] soft key : Machining condition block is recorded to the temporary, and data input
screen of the island figure block is displayed.
Left [ ] soft key : Inserting pocket figure block is canceled.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

<5> Input the items on the following data input screen of island figure block.
Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 32/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

ISLAND FIGURE ( 01/16 )


The number of island
H=
(Editing number / Total numer )
V=
U=
W=
B=
L=
R=

EDIT 09:07:49

←ISL ISL→ ADD EXIT

[ADD] soft key : The data input screen for input newly island is displayed. At this time, input
data of island figure block under the edit, is recorded. Then TOTAL number
is increased by one.
[←ISL] soft key : The data input screen for the island of the previous number is displayed.
[ISL→] soft key : The data input screen for the island of the next number is displayed.
[EXIT] soft key : All input pocket figure blocks and island figure block is inserted or updated
to the program. Then, the main menu screen is displayed.
Left [ ] soft key : When the number of island is 1, inserting island figure block is canceled.

Note
All input pocket figure block and island figure block is not inserted or updated
until [EXIT] soft key is pressed.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATORS MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 33/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.2.2 Modification of program


(1) For modification of machining condition figure block
<1> In program editor of NC, by pressing the [C.A.P.] soft key when the cursor is on a G1049 block,
the data input screen for the machining condition block is displayed.
<2> Press the [OK] soft key after editing the input items. Then, G1049 block is rewritten by the
value input to the input item, and program editor of NC is displayed.

(1) For modification of pocket figure block and island figure block
<1> In program editor of NC, by pressing the [C.A.P.] soft key when the cursor is on a G1990 block,
the data input screen for the pocket figure block is displayed.
<2> Press the [ISLAND] soft key after editing the input item. Then, the data input screen for the
island figure block is displayed.
<3> Select the island to be edit by [←ISL] / [ISL→] soft key, and edit the input items.
<4> When all of editing is done, press the [EXIT] soft key. Then, the data of the pocket figure block
and island figure block is rewritten, and program editor of NC is displayed.

Note
The figure block in this cycle can not be inserted / edited, by [FIGURE] soft key on the
main menu screen.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 34/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

4.3 Alarm message


The following alarm messages might be occurred, when the Pocket machining cycle with islands
is executed.
Alarm
Description
No.
Message NO CUTTING AREA
There is no area that can be machined. The tool is too large for the
3050 Cause
specified machining area.
Action Modify the machining program to use a smaller tool.
Message NO MACHINING CYCLE BLOCK
No machining cycle is found. No machining type block is found; only a
Cause
3053 figure block is specified.
Modify the machining program by, for example, adding the necessary
Action
machining type block.
Message WRONG G-CODE
3054 Cause No machining cycle is found. An unavailable machining cycle is specified.
Action Necessary options may not be added. Contact the machine tool builder.
Message NO NECESSARY ADDRESS
With a cycle machining command or other 4-digit G commands, necessary
Cause
3056 arguments are not entered.
Modify the machining program by, for example, adding necessary
Action
arguments.
Message WRONG CUTTING DIRECTION
Cause The cutting direction specification is invalid.
3057
A value not specifiable as turning or other cutting directions is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate cutting direction.
Message WRONG THICKNESS
Cause The surplus thickness specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as pocketing or other surplus thicknesses is
3058
entered,
Action
such as a negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an
appropriate surplus thickness.
Message WRONG TOOL DIAMETER
Cause The cutter radius is invalid.
3059 A value not specifiable as a cutter radius is entered, such as a negative
Action value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate cutter
radius.
Message WRONG CUTTING DEPTH
Cause The depth of cut is invalid.
3060 A value not specifiable as a depth of cut is entered, such as a negative
Action value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate depth of
cut.
Message WRONG CLEARANCE
Cause The clearance is invalid.
3062 A value not specifiable as a clearance is entered, such as a negative
Action value.
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate clearance.
FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i
Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 35/36


7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

Alarm
Description
No.
Message WRONG FINISHING ALLOWANCE
Cause The finishing allowance is invalid.
3063 A value not specifiable as a finishing allowance is entered, such as a
Action negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate
finishing allowance.
Message WRONG FEED RATE
Cause The feedrate is invalid.
3064
A value not specifiable as a feedrate is entered, such as zero. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate feedrate.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G0,1,2,3
3065 Cause Modal can’t be save and restored.
Action Command G00, G01, G02 or G03 before the cycle is executed.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G80.
3066 Cause Modal can’t be save and restored.
Action Command G80 before the cycle is executed.
Message WRONG FIGURE TYPE
Cause The figure type is invalid.
3067
A type not specifiable as the figure type of a figure block is selected.
Action
Specify correct type.
Message WRONG STANDARD POSITION
Cause The reference position is invalid.
3068 A value not specifiable as the reference position of a figure block is
Action entered.
Specify correct value.
Message WRONG HEIGHT/DEPTH
Cause The height/depth is invalid.
3069
A value not specifiable as the height/depth of a figure block is entered.
Action
Specify correct value.
Message MODAL IS OUT OF G40.
3071 Cause Modal can’t be save and restored.
Action Command G40 before the cycle is executed.
Message GROUP SET MISMATCH
Cause The arbitrary figure group specification is not correct.
3072
In the group specification used in, for example, pocketing with islands,
Action
either the start or end block is not entered. Enter an appropriate block.
Message NUMBER OF ISLANDS EXCEED MAX.
3073 Cause The number of islands defined in one pocket has exceeded the limitation.
Action Decrease the number of islands or divide the machining cycle.
Message NO MEMORY
3098 Cause There is no memory by an internal problem..
Action -
Message SYSTEM ERROR
3099 Cause system error by an internal problem occurred.
Action -

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 36/36


Addition to FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i
OPERATOR'S MANUAL

1. Type of applied technical documents

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Spec. No./Ed. B-64434EN/02

2. Summary of Change

New, Add,
Applicable
Group Name/Outline Correct,
Date
Delete
Basic
Series 0i-F is available. Add Immediately
Function
Optional
Function
Unit

Maintenance
Parts
Notice
This manual is a common manual with Series 0i-D.

Correction

Another

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL

01 2015.07.09 Newly Designed Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 1/2

© MyFANUC 9F1EE85456CF4C26B17C72F7835AB1AB
ABOUT USE WITH Series 0i-F
The usage of MANUAL GUIDE 0i in Series 0i-F is basically the same as that in Series 0i-D.
Please read the explanation of Series 0i-D as the explanation of Series 0i-F.
The points noted with the Series 0i-F is follows.

Replace the following description to Section 1,”MAIN MENU SCREEN” in Part II, “BASIC
SCREEN AND OPERATIONS”.

NOTE
1 MANUAL GUIDE 0i requires a work program that stores a CNC program to be created
temporarily. Set parameter No. 9358 to the number of this work program.
(If this parameter is not set, the screen of MANUAL GUIDE 0i does not appear.)
2 The program to be displayed by soft key [C.A.P.] depends on the cursor position on the
NC program edit screen.
• When the cursor positions in the block containing a 4-digit code for machining cycle,
the machining cycle data input screen is displayed.
• When the cursor positions in a block not containing a 4-digit code for machining
cycle, the main menu screen is displayed.
3 When soft key [C.A.P.] is pressed if there is no CNC program, a warning saying
"INITIALIZATION OF MG0I CANNOT BE COMPLETED." is displayed. Be sure to
create one or more CNC programs before pressing soft key [C.A.P.].
4 In Series 0i-F, as a program is managed by the program folder, the program outputted
by MANUAL GUIDE 0i is created on the current program folder.
5 In Series 0i-F, a program with arbitrary program name can be used. But, in case of
selecting the program as a main program, MANUAL GUIDE 0i cannot be started up. In
case of starting it, the warning is displayed.

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE 0i


Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Draw. B-64434EN/02-1

Ed. Date Design Description Page 2/2

© MyFANUC 9F1EE85456CF4C26B17C72F7835AB1AB
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 INDEX

INDEX
<A> <E>
ALARMS .....................................................................105 EDITING A MACHINING CYCLE.........................26,46
ARC ...........................................................62,72,85,89,99
ARC THAT CONTACTS TO BOTH CROSSING <F>
LINES AND ARCS...............................................65,92 FACE MACHINING .....................................................32
ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING 2 ARCS66,93 Figure Block..................................... 29,33,35,37,49,51,52
ARC THAT CONTACTS TO UNCROSSING LINE
AND ARC .............................................................66,93 <G>
“AUTOMATIC CALCULATING END POINT” TYPE G Code Graph Screen ....................................................13
....................................................................................54 G Code Help Screen.......................................................11
Automatic Calculation of Figure Block .........................60 G CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION .................................11
Auxiliary Calculation ................................................67,94 G Code Text Screen .......................................................12
AUXILIARY EXPLANATION ON THE GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............... s-1
CUATOMIZATION OF “M CODE SUPPORT GROOVE MACHINING...............................................35
FUNCTION” ............................................................122 GROOVING ..................................................................49
AUXILIARY EXPLANATION ON THE
CUSTOMIZING METHOD OF “M CODE <H>
SUPPORT FUNCTION”..........................................123 HOLE MACHINING.....................................................27

<B> <I>
Building Customized Conversational Macro Programs128 INPUT ITEM OF EACH CYCLE ............................27,47
INPUT ITEMS.................................................................9
<C> Input Method of Figure Block........................................58
Calculation of Inputting Data.......................................100 “INPUTING DIRECTLY END POINT” TYPE ............75
CALLING CONTOUR PROGRAMMING SCREEN ...79
CHAMFERING .............................................................85 <L>
Changing Message according to the selected display LATHE SYSTEM ALARMS ......................................106
language ...................................................................125 LATHE SYSTEM PARAMETERS.............................112
CHECKING CONTOUR PROGRAMS ........................82 LINE .......................................................... 60,71,84,87,98
CONDITIONS FOR USING MANUAL GUIDE 0i ........4 LINE TANGENTIAL TO TWO ARCS....................64,91
CONTOUR CALCULATION .......................................87 LINKING MACRO CREATED BY MACHINE TOOL
CONTOUR FIGURE DATA .........................................84 BUILDER WITH MANUAL GUIDE 0i MACRO..120
CONTOUR PROGRAMMING FUNCTION ................20
CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM....................................82
<M>
M Code Help Screen ......................................................16
CORNER R....................................................................85
M CODE SUPPORT FUNCTION.................................16
CREATING A MACRO PROGRAM..........................120
M Code Text Screen ......................................................17
CUSTOM SOFTWARE CAPACITY ..........................121
CUSTOMIZATION OF MANUAL GUIDE 0i BY THE MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM ALARMS ............105
MACHINING CYCLE FUNCTION .............................19
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER..................................122
MACHINING TYPE ................................................23,41
Customizing M Code Help Screen ...............................122
Machining Type Block................ 27,32,33,35,47,48,49,52
Customizing M Code Text Screen ...............................122
MAIN MENU SCREEN ..................................................7
Customizing Method of M Code Help Screen .............123
Method od Displaying Title of M Code Explanation...126
Customizing Method of M Code Text Screen..............126
METHOD OF CREATING A CONTOUR PROGRAM80
<D> Method of Creating Figure.............................................75
DEFINING FIGURE FOR TURNING ..........................54 Method of Creating of turning Figure ............................55
Defining Message to Display on the M Code List .......124 Method of Defining Message for M Code Explanation127
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND Method of Displaying M code Explanation .................127
NOTE ........................................................................s-1
Displaying Method of M Code List .............................123
<N>
NEWLY CREATING A MACHINING CYCLE .....24,42
Displaying Method of M Code Text Screen from M
Notes ............................................................................101
Code Help Screen.....................................................126
DRILLING.....................................................................47
<O>
OPERATING METHOD ..................................... 24,42,79
i-1
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

INDEX B-64434EN/02

Operating Method of Drilling, Grooving, or Threading.44


Operating Method of Turning ........................................42
OTHERS .................................................................74,100
OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL ...............................s-2

<P>
PARAMETERS ...........................................................108
PARAMETERS COMMON TO THE MACHINING
CENTER AND LATHE SYSTEM ..........................108
POCKET MACHINING ................................................33
PROCESS SUPPORT FUNCTION .................................9

<R>
RESTRICTIONS ON MACRO PROGRAM
NUMBERS...............................................................120
RESTRICTIONS ON MACRO VARIABLES ............121

<S>
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1
Sample of Messages in Chinese (Traditional character)144
Sample of Messages in Czech ......................................155
Sample of Messages in Each Language .......................128
Sample of Messages in English....................................131
Sample of Messages in French.....................................139
Sample of Messages in Germany .................................133
Sample of Messages in Italy.........................................136
Sample of Messages in Japanese..................................128
Sample of Messages in Polish ......................................150
Sample of Messages in Portuguese ..............................147
Sample of Messages in Spanish ...................................142
Sample of Messages in Swedish ..................................152
SCREENS AND OPERATIONS ...........................9,11,16
SELECT CROSSING POINT OF FIGURE...................86
Selecting Method of Editing The Turning Figure ..........54
SELECTING OF METHOD TO EDIT OF CONTOUR
PROGRAM ................................................................80
START POINT ....................................................68,84,95
Start-up Method ........................................................54,75
SUPPORTED G CODES ...............................................13
SUPPORTED M CODES ..............................................17

<T>
THREADING ................................................................52
TURNING......................................................................48

<W>
WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE 0i?....................................3

i-2
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02 REVISION RECORD

REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
・ Addition of the explanation on the condition for using MANUAL GUIDE 0i
・ Division of the explanation on the contour figure input and turning figure input
02 Dec., 2010 ・ Addition of the alarm number and the explanation of the added alarm
・ Deletion of the explanation on the customization of G-code support and Process support
・ Correction of errors, etc
01 Jul., 2008

r-1
7169F5zYc4Qho1FjeEgA769zj//VR44njCmQCwlefxytWPRQC+2wd68VWEg==

B-64434EN/02

* B- 6 4 4 3 4 EN/ 0 2 . 0 2 *

You might also like